Nortel CallPilot

High Availability: Installation and

Configuration

NN44200-311
.
Document status: Standard
Document version: 01.18
Document date: 23 April 2010

Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks

All Rights Reserved.

Sourced in Canada

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical
data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without
express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this
document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.

The process of transmitting data and call messaging between the CallPilot server and the switch or system is
proprietary to Nortel Networks. Any other use of the data and the transmission process is a violation of the user
license unless specifically authorized in writing by Nortel Networks prior to such use. Violations of the license by
alternative usage of any portion of this process or the related hardware constitutes grounds for an immediate
termination of the license and Nortel Networks reserves the right to seek all allowable remedies for such breach.

Trademarks
Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, and Unified Networks, BNR, CallPilot, DMS, DMS-100, DMS-250, DMS-MTX,
DMS-SCP, DPN, Dualmode, Helmsman, IVR, MAP, Meridian, Meridian 1, Meridian Link, Meridian Mail, Norstar, SL-1,
SL-100, Succession, Supernode, Symposium, Telesis, and Unity are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

3COM is a trademark of 3Com Corporation.

ADOBE is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

ATLAS is a trademark of Quantum Corporation.

AUTOSTART is a trademark of EMC Corporation.

BLACKBERRY is a trademark of Research in Motion Limited.

CRYSTAL REPORTS is a trademark of Seagate Software Inc.

EUDORA and QUALCOMM are trademarks of Qualcomm, Inc.

ETRUST and INOCULATEIT are trademarks of Computer Associates Think Inc.

DIRECTX, EXCHANGE.NET, FRONTPAGE, INTERNET EXPLORER, LINKEXCHANGE, MICROSOFT,

MICROSOFT EXCHANGE SERVER, MS-DOS, NETMEETING, OUTLOOK, POWERPOINT, VISUAL STUDIO,
WINDOWS, WINDOWS MEDIA, WINDOWS NT, and WINDOWS SERVER are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

GROUPWISE and NOVELL are trademarks of Novell Inc.

INTEL is a trademark of Intel Corporation.

LOGITECH is a trademark of Logitech, Inc.

MCAFEE and NETSHIELD are trademarks of McAfee Associates, Inc.

MYLEX is a trademark of Mylex Corporation.

NETSCAPE COMMUNICATOR is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.

NOTES is a trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.

NORTON ANTIVIRUS and PCANYWHERE are trademarks of Symantec Corporation.

QUICKTIME is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

RADISYS is a trademark of Radisys Corporation.

ROLM is a trademark of Siemens ROLM Communications Inc.

SLR4, SLR5, and TANDBERG are trademarks of Tandberg Data ASA.

SONY is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

SYBASE is a trademark of Sybase, Inc.

TEAC is a trademark of TEAC Corporation.

US ROBOTICS, the US ROBOTICS logo, and SPORTSTER are trademarks of US Robotics.

WINZIP is a trademark of Nico Mark Computing, Inc.

XEON is a trademark of Intel, Inc.

All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
 5

Publication History
April 2010
CallPilot 5.0 Standard 1.18 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued to include the procedure for Installing the
AutoStart software on the replacement server for Chapter 6 Maintaining
a High Availability system and update Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations,
and feature expansion with the procedure for Configuring the replacement
server using the Configuration Wizard.

January 2010
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.17 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation and
Configuration is up-issued to properly identify CP1 and CP2 as replacement
or existing servers.

December 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.16 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued to include changes in the chapter Call Pilot
Configuration Wizard.

November 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.15 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation and
Configuration is up-issued to include changes in the chapter Install and
configure the High Availability pair.

October 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.14 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation and
Configuration is up-issued to change Chapter 3 to Preparing for Installation.

October 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.13 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued to add instructions on RAID splitting on HA
systems in the section Maintaining a High Availability system.

June 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.12 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation and
Configuration is up-issued to update Install PEPs and Uninstalling PEPs
procedures into Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
6 Publication History

May 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.11 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation and
Configuration is up-issued to add a CallPilot Manager, Channel Monitor
section into Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system.

March 2009
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 1.10 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued to add a procedure for adding
Channels/Features/Licenses in a single HA procedure.

December 2008
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.09 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued to add Attention box in procedure Connecting
and verifying LAN connections.

September 2008
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.08 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued to include information about ACD queue in
the procedure Configuring CP1 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard
and content in the Introduction section of the chapter Upgrades, migrations,
and feature expansion.

September 2008
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.07 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is up-issued with the content in the procedure Configure
the existing server and replacement server using the CallPilot Configuration
Wizard and with the content in the section Switch Planning.

May 2007
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.06 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is issued for general release.

April 2007
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.05 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is issued for general release.

April 2007
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.04 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is issued for general release.

April 2007
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.03 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is issued for general release.

March 2007
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.02 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is issued for general release.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Publication History 7

March 2007
CallPilot 5.0, Standard 01.01 of the CallPilot High Availability: Installation
and Configuration is issued for general release.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
8 Publication History

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 9

Contents
Chapter 1 How to get help 13
Chapter 2 Introduction 15
Overview of High Availability 15
High Availability hardware 16
Heartbeat signals 16
Mirroring 16
Managed TCP/IP settings 17
Switch connectivity 18
High Availability network 18
AutoStart software 18
Failovers 20
Limitations 20
Reference documents 22
Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation 25
Introduction 25
Management of the TCP/IP network 25
Network planning 27
Planning the High Availability configuration 28
High Availability system checklist 29
Facility planning 31
Switch planning 32
Meridian 1 planning 33
CS 1000 planning 33
Required hardware 33
Hardware included 33
Customer provided equipment 35
Supported hardware configurations 35
Chapter 4 Failover overview 37
Introduction 37
Automatic failovers 38
Manual failovers 39

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
10 Contents

Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair 41

New system installation procedure 41
Prepare the switch and install the 1005r or 1006r servers 44
Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers 45
Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 54
Connect and verify LAN connections 75
Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2
configuration 82
Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 86
Install the AutoStart software on CP1 86
Add the node 2 administrator account to the AutoStart Console on node 1 94
Install the AutoStart software on CP2 96
Configure the AutoStart software 106
Configure the AutoStart software on CP1 106
Import the AutoStart definition file on CP1 114
Add the Windows administrator password for the AutoStart Utility Processes 115
Add e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule 117
Bring the Resource Groups online 119
Bring the CallPilot Resource Group online on CP1 119
Bring the Resource Groups CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] online 122
Test your configuration 124
Create the CallPilot Reporter connections 125
Add the servers to a Windows domain 127
Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system 133
CallPilot Configuration Wizard 133
Change the Server Information 134
Change the Media Allocation 141
Change the Switch Configuration 143
Install a new language 146
Change the Network Interface Card configuration and network settings 149
Change the administrator account password for the Utility Processes 163
Increase software licenses 164
Increase CallPilot channel capacity by adding MPB96 boards 173
Working with domains and workgroups 180
Moving from a domain to a workgroup 180
Manually change the administrator password 184
EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 187
AutoStart maintenance 187
Work with resource groups 213
Perform failovers and monitoring 217
Software operations 221
Support 235

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Contents 11

Install PEPs 235

Uninstall PEPs 237
Uninstalling PEPs 238
Microsoft Hotfixes 240
Remote support 240
Backup and restore 243
Reimage or replace a server in the High Availability pair 250
Installing the AutoStart software on the replacement server 258
RAID splitting for HA systems 268
Splitting the RAID on a 1005r server 268
CallPilot Manager, Channel Monitor 272
Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion 273
Introduction 273
Guidelines 275
Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0
1005r or 1006r server 277
Feature expansion task list 278
Prepare the switch 278
Install the new 1005r or 1006r server (CP2) 279
Record the current 1005r or 1006r server configuration (CP1) 280
Run the Upgrade Wizard on the existing server (CP1) 281
Prepare the new 1005r or 1006r server (CP2) 284
Run the Setup Wizard on CP2 285
Configure CP1 using the Configuration Wizard 290
Configuring the replacement server using the Configuration Wizard 294
Complete the High Availability configuration process 299

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
12 Contents

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 13

Chapter 1
How to get help
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel Web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support Web site:
www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and
tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
• download software, documentation, and product bulletins
• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base
for answers to technical issues
• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation
for Nortel equipment
• open and manage technical support cases

Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center

If you don not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical
Support Web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help
over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.

In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).

Outside North America, go to the following Web site to obtain the phone
number for your region:

www.nortel.com/callus

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code

To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express
Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel
product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
14 Chapter 1 How to get help

www.nortel.com/erc

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor
or reseller.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 15

Chapter 2
Introduction
In this chapter
"Overview of High Availability" (page 15)

"High Availability hardware" (page 16)

"High Availability network" (page 18)

"AutoStart software" (page 18)

"Failovers" (page 20)

"Limitations" (page 20)

"Reference documents" (page 22)

Overview of High Availability

In a High Availability configuration, a pair of peer CallPilot servers are used
in the place of a single server. Both servers are connected to the same
switch (Meridian 1 or Communication Server 1000 [CS 1000]) and they are
configured so that one CallPilot server is active (that is, processing calls)
and the other server is in standby mode.
The standby server takes over if the active server fails (due to predefined
failure conditions), or if the administrator decides to manually switch over
to the standby server. This process is known as a failover. For more
information, see "Failovers" (page 20).
To support a High Availability configuration for CallPilot, a combination of
hardware and third-party software is required, as follows:
• There is an entry in the CallPilot 5.0 keycode for the High Availability
feature.
• High Availability is supported only on the 1005r and 1006r platforms. For
more information about the hardware, see "High Availability hardware"
(page 16).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
16 Chapter 2 Introduction

• System control and monitoring and disk mirroring of the High Availability
system is provided by the EMC AutoStart software. For more
information, see "AutoStart software" (page 18).

High Availability hardware

High Availability is supported only on the 1005r and 1006r platforms.
Two servers, either a 1005r pair or 1006r pair, are required for the High
Availability configuration.
The 1005r and 1006r servers are equipped with two extra dual-Ethernet
interface cards that provide the following three connections between the
two High Availability servers:
• The Heartbeat signal (HB1) connection is used to monitor the state
of the active server.
• The Heartbeat backup signal (HB2) connection is a backup of HB1 in
case the IP interface for HB1 fails.
• The Mirroring connection is used for mirroring data between the two
servers.

ATTENTION
These three connections are critical to High Availability operation. Nortel
recommends that these three connections be made directly, using crossover
cables instead of a hub or switch. Failure of any device such as a hub or switch
in the signal path can create an unwanted results.

Heartbeat signals
The standby server needs a way to tell if the active server is running to know
when to take control if the active serves ceases to run. This is accomplished
through the use of a heartbeat signal that is communicated between the
active and standby server.

Due to the importance of the heartbeat signal, a pair of physical links

(Heartbeat 1 and Heartbeat 2) between the active and the standby servers
are used to transport the signal. This way, if either of the links fail, the
heartbeat signal still has a path between the two servers.

Mirroring
In order for the standby server to take over call processing, the server must
have the same configuration as the failed active server and have access to
all of the data (such as the users and the Application Builder applications)
on the failed server. This task is accomplished by mirroring data between
the two servers. This way, if an active server fails, the standby server of the
pair has an up-to-date copy of all of the data from the active server so it can
take over the role of the failed active server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 High Availability hardware 17

Managed TCP/IP settings

To the external IP network (including the end users, the switch, and the
CallPilot Web applications) the pair of servers must look like one server.
To accomplish this, Managed IP (also called virtual IP) addresses and
host name settings are used. The Managed IP addresses and host name
settings allow the pair of CallPilot High Availability servers to appear as one
IP address to the outside IP network.

The following figure shows two CallPilot servers and the connections
between them.

Figure 1
Example of a High Availability system

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
18 Chapter 2 Introduction

Switch connectivity
Both CallPilot servers have a DS30 connection to the switch. As a result,
the number of MGate cards required in the switch is double the number
required for a single CallPilot server. For a pair of servers providing 192
channels, the switch must have a total of 12 MGate cards installed (six
MGate cards per 192 channels times two servers). At any one time only one
of the two CallPilot servers is up and running. Therefore, even though there
are 384 channels configured on the switch, a maximum of 192 channels are
available for call processing at any one time.

High Availability network

The following figure shows the network containing the two High Availability
servers (CallPilot 1 and CallPilot 2).

Figure 2
High Availability network

AutoStart software
The AutoStart software is installed on each server and performs the
following functions:
• Monitors the status of both servers in the High Availability pair.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 AutoStart software 19

• Performs an automatic failover when a failure condition is detected.

• Keeps the hard drives on both servers synchronized through a mirroring
process.
• Manages the IP addresses of the ELAN subnet and Nortel Server
subnet, making the server pair appear as a single server to the network.
• Provides a mechanism for administrator-initiated (manual) failovers.

The CallPilot High Availability system uses the following components of

the AutoStart software:
• AutoStart Agent—The Agent software resides on both CallPilot servers
and provides the disk mirroring and managed IP services. The AutoStart
Agent includes the set of processes that performs the AutoStart
monitoring and management functionality.
• AutoStart Backbone—The AutoStart Backbone includes the processes
running on the AutoStart Agent that provide messaging services.
• AutoStart Console—The Console software provides a visual interface
to the High Availability server pair and is used to administer the Agent
software installed on the CallPilot servers. By default, the Console
software is installed on both CallPilot servers so administration of the
pair can be done when the administrator is logged on to either server;
however, the Console software can also be installed on a PC on the
Nortel Server subnet for remote administration.
The AutoStart Console provides the following:
— A centralized monitoring and administration tool for taking managed
resources and resource groups online and offline, which reduces
administrative overhead.
— A real-time reflection of object states. As soon as AutoStart detects
a state change for an object, the graphical interface updates its
display to reflect that change. See "Checking the status of the
servers and failovers" (page 198).
— An interface to define and configure all the managed resources from
a single local or remote location.

The AutoStart software is manually installed when you configure the pair of
CallPilot servers with the High Availability feature. The required AutoStart
software is included on the CallPilot 5.0 Applications CD.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
20 Chapter 2 Introduction

ATTENTION
This version of the software is tested and verified to work correctly with the
CallPilot 5.0 High Availability feature. The AutoStart software on the CallPilot
server must not be updated or patched unless the new software or patch is tested
and validated by Nortel.

Failovers
In a High Availability system, one server is active while the other is in the
standby mode. If a predefined failure occurs on the active server, the
standby server comes into service, becoming the active server. The process
of the standby server becoming the active server is called a failover.

For more information, see Chapter 4 "Failover overview" (page 37).

Limitations
The limitations of the High Availability system include the following:
• The two High Availability servers must be collocated. The locations of
the servers are limited by the length of the cables that connect the High
Availability servers to the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 switch. The 1005r High
Availability pair can either use DS30X or CAT5 cables while the 1006r
High Availability pair can only use CAT5 cables. The maximum length of
the DS30X cables is 60 feet or 18.29 meters long. The maximum length
of the CAT5 cables is 984 feet or 300 meters long.
• Failover limitations include the following:
— Any connections (that is, calls in progress) to the active CallPilot
server are lost after a automatic or manual failover occurs.
— There is a window during the failover when neither the active
nor standby server is available; therefore, the CallPilot system is
inaccessible. In the default configuration, voice processing is not
available for approximately 10 minutes after the failover is started.
This time can be decreased by disabling the DSP diagnostics.
Other services, such as Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
connections, may be available in a shorter window.
— Only a limited number of automatic failover cases are supported,
as follows:
– A reboot or shut down of the active server.
– Loss of connection on the ELAN at the TCP/IP level (for example,
failure of the server to respond to the ping command for a
specified period of time).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Limitations 21

– Failure of one or more of the critical CallPilot services. The

system attempts to restart a failed critical CallPilot service three
times before resorting to a failover.

• Mirroring limitations include the following:

— Due to the way the AutoStart software does disk mirroring, the
mirrored drives cannot be accessed on the standby server while in
use on the active server. This means that the multimedia file system
(MMFS), database, and Application Builder applications cannot be
accessed on the standby server while the active server is up and
running.
— There is no way to break the mirroring between the active and
standby servers (to make the mirrored drives visible on the standby
server while the active server is running) without also temporarily
taking down the active server.

• Performance Enhancement Packages (PEPs) must be applied

individually to each server in the High Availability pair.
• The CallPilot 5.0 High Availability feature does not support geographic
redundancy.
• The Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM) prefix on both servers in a
High Availability server must be the same.
• If the High Availability system is part of a Windows Domain, both servers
(CP1 and CP2) must belong to the same Windows domain.
• The CallPilot system monitor cannot run on the standby server as there
are no database, MMFS access, or CallPilot services running.
• If scheduled backups are performed to a local tape drive on the active
server, the backup fails after a switchover unless the tape drive is
physically moved and connected to the standby server or a second tape
drive is connected to the standby server.
• If scheduled backups are preformed to a remote backup device (that
is, a network share), the same backup device must be configured
through CallPilot Manager on both servers in the pair. If the device is
only defined on the active server, any scheduled backups to that device
fail on the standby server.
• The computer names of the High Availability servers must contain only
alphanumeric characters. Nonalphanumeric characters (such as a
hyphen [-] ) are not allowed.
• In CallPilot 5.0, you can use the High Availability feature with CallPilot
and Contact Center 6 and 7 integration, but it requires supplemental PEP
updates to CS 1000, Contact Center, and CallPilot. For more information
about CallPilot High Availability and Contact Center Inter-working, see

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
22 Chapter 2 Introduction

DTR-2007-0069-Global-Rev12 – CallPilot Release 5.0 (see appendices

specific for High Availability and Contact Center inter-working)

Reference documents
For a list of all CallPilot documents, see the following CallPilot Customer
Documentation Map.

Call Pilot Customer Documentation Map

Fundamentals
Fundamentals Guide (NN44200-100)
Library Listing (NN44200-117)
Planning and Engineering
Planning and Engineering Guide (NN44200-200)
Network Planning Guide (NN44200-201)
Converging the Data Network with VoIP Guide (NN43001-260)
Solution Integration Guide for Communication Server 1000/Call Pilot/Contact
Center/Telephony Manager (NN49000-300)
Installation and Configuration
Upgrade and Platform Migration Guide (NN44200-400)
High Availability: Installation and Configuration (NN44200-311)
Installation and Configuration Task List Guide (NN44200-306)
Quickstart Guide (NN44200-313)
Installer Roadmap (NN44200-314)
Server Installation Guides
201i Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-301)
202i Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-317)
202i Installer Roadmap (NN44200-319)
703t Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-304)
1002rp Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-300)
1002rp System Evaluation (NN44200-318)
1005r Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-308)
1005r System Evaluation (NN44200-316)
1006r Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-320)
600r Server Hardware Installation Guide (NN44200-307)
600r System Evaluation (NN44200-315)
Configuration and Testing Guides
Meridian 1 and CallPilot Server Configuration Guide (NN44200-302)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Reference documents 23

T1/SMDI and CallPilot Server Configuration Guide (NN44200-303)

Communication Server 1000 System and CallPilot Server Configuration Guide
(NN44200-312)
Unified Messaging Software Installation
Desktop Messaging and My CallPilot Installation and Administration Guide
(NN44200-305)
Administration
Administrator Guide (NN44200-601)
Software Administration and Maintenance Guide (NN44200-600)
Meridian Mail to CallPilot Migration Utility Guide (NN44200-502)
Application Builder Guide (NN44200-102)
Reporter Guide (NN44200-603)
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Reference Guide (NN44200-700)
Preventative Maintenance Guide (NN44200-505)
Server Maintenance and Diagnostics
201i Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-705)
202i Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-708)
703t Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-702)
1002rp Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-701)
1005r Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-704)
1006r Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-709)
600r Server Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide (NN44200-703)
Contact Center Manager Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 & Voice
Processing Guide (297-2183-931)
End User Information
End User Cards
Unified Messaging Quick Reference Card (NN44200-111)
Unified Messaging Wallet Card (NN44200-112)
A-Style Command Comparison Card (NN44200-113)
S-Style Command Comparison Card (NN44200-114)
Menu Interface Quick Reference Card (NN44200-115)
Alternate Command Interface Quick Reference Card (NN44200-116)
Multimedia Messaging User Guide (NN44200-106)
Speech Activated Messaging User Guide (NN44200-107)
Desktop Messaging User Guide for Microsoft Outlook (NN44200-103)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
24 Chapter 2 Introduction

Desktop Messaging User Guide for Lotus Notes (NN44200-104)

Desktop Messaging User Guide for Novell Groupwise (NN44200-105)
Desktop Messaging User Guide for Internet Clients (NN44200-108)
Desktop Messaging User Guide for My CallPilot (NN44200-109)
Voice Forms Transcriber User Guide (NN44200-110)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 25

Chapter 3
Preparing for Installation
In this chapter
"Introduction" (page 25)

"Management of the TCP/IP network" (page 25)

"Network planning" (page 27)

"Planning the High Availability configuration" (page 28)

"High Availability system checklist" (page 29)

"Facility planning" (page 31)

"Switch planning" (page 32)

"Required hardware" (page 33)

Introduction
For detailed CallPilot 5.0 and 1005r or 1006r server information, see the
Planning and Engineering Guide (NN44200-200).

Planning and engineering information specific to High Availability is covered

in this chapter.

Management of the TCP/IP network

Each server in the pair of High Availability servers requires its own unique
host name, ELAN IP address, and CLAN IP address. In addition, the pair of
servers are assigned a Managed (or virtual) host name, Managed ELAN IP
address, and Managed CLAN IP address to make the pair of servers look
like a single CallPilot server to the end clients. The end clients include
the following:
• CallPilot Reporter

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
26 Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation

• My CallPilot
• Desktop Client
• Application Builder
• CallPilot Manager
• the switch

The managed network settings must be used by all clients. The clients do
not need to access either server directly. All access must be done using
the managed networking parameters. The EMC AutoStart software ensures
that the currently active server responds to any requests made to either the
Managed host name or IP addresses.
The CallPilot High Availability system uses managed networking settings so
that common settings are used by the CallPilot clients, as follows:
• CallPilot Reporter, My CallPilot, Desktop Client, Application Builder, and
CallPilot Manager (accessed using the Web) use the Managed CLAN
IP address and host name.
• The switch uses the Managed ELAN IP address.

When a switchover occurs from Node 1 (CP1) to Node 2 (CP2), the CallPilot
applications and the switch do not change IP settings and the clients do not
notice any changes. The Managed CLAN requires IP name resolution. This
means that the manage CLAN must be manually added by a Domain Name
Service (DNS) administrator if you are using a DNS server as the solution or
the host file must be updated on both the CP1 and CP2 servers.

For servers that are receiving the High Availability feature expansion, it
is important that the current host name, CLAN IP address, and ELAN
IP address are reused as the Managed host name, Managed CLAN IP
address, and Managed ELAN IP address for the new High Availability pair.
Reusing the network settings as the managed network settings ensures
that any existing clients (for example, desktop client installations) do not
have to change their configuration to access the new High Availability pair.
The clients are unaware that there is now a pair of High Availability servers
where there used to be a single CallPilot server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Network planning 27

WARNING
If you do not reuse the existing host name, ELAN IP address,
and CLAN IP address during an upgrade and you have an
existing CallPilot Reporter installation with historical data, after
the upgrade, all new data is recorded against the new Managed
host name. Any older data collected in CallPilot Reporter does
not appear.
If you do not reuse the existing host name, ELAN IP address,
and CLAN IP address during an upgrade and you have existing
Application Builder applications, then after the upgrade the
applications must be recreated.

Network planning
In addition to the CLAN and ELAN connections, a pair of High Availability
servers has three additional dedicated network interface ports for the
following:
• HB1 (Heartbeat 1)
• HB2 (Heartbeat 2 backup)
• Mirror (Data mirroring between the two servers)

The NICs must be physically connected between the two servers using
crossover LAN cables and must not be run through any type of switch or
hub, as such a configuration is not supported.

WARNING
Crossover cables must be used to connect the NICs between the
two High Availability servers.
Networking equipment (switch, hub, or router) is not supported in
this configuration. The only supported configuration is the use
of dedicated crossover LAN cables between the HB1, HB2, and
Mirror NICs between the two High Availability servers.

The networking parameters (that is, IP address and subnet mask) for both
nodes in the High Availability pair must be set before the EMC AutoStart
software is installed or the High Availability pair does not work correctly
(see "Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software " (page 86)). Each
network connection must be on a different subnet. Nortel recommends the
following values be used for the dedicated network connections:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
28 Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation

Table 1
Node 1
Network Interface Card (NIC) IP address Subnet mask
Heartbeat 1 (HB1) 192.0.0.10 255.255.255.0
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) 194.0.0.10 255.255.255.0
MIRROR 193.0.0.10 255.255.255.0

Table 2
Node 2
Network Interface Card (NIC) IP address Subnet mask
Heartbeat 1 (HB1) 192.0.0.11 255.255.255.0
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) 194.0.0.11 255.255.255.0
MIRROR 193.0.0.11 255.255.255.0

During the configuration of the High Availability servers, a CLAN Test IP

address is required. The CLAN Test IP address can be any reliable working
IP address on the CLAN subnet (Nortel server subnet). As a result, the
High Availability system can ping this IP address at any time. If the CLAN
subnet (Nortel server subnet) is configured, Nortel recommends that the
CLAN Gateway IP address be used as the CLAN Test IP address. If the
gateway is configured such that it does not reply to the ping command,
another CLAN address that responds to the ping command must be used.
If there is no CLAN subnet (Nortel server subnet) at the your site, enter
127.0.0.1 as the CLAN Test IP address.

Planning the High Availability configuration

During the configuration of the High Availability servers, the following
information is needed by the High Availability Configuration Wizard (see
Figure 32 "High Availability Configuration Wizard" (page 83)):
• User Name—This is the Windows administrator user name. Nortel
recommends the use of the Windows default administrator user name
(that is, administrator).
If you use any other Windows user name, that user must have the full
Windows administrative rights. Enter the name of a Windows account
that is a member of the administrators group and that exists on both
servers in the pair.
Nortel recommends using the account called administrator. However, if
the administrator account is renamed or another administrator account
with a different name is created, use that renamed or new account.
• Server Workgroup / Domain Name—This is the Windows Workgroup
/ Domain name. Enter workgroup for the default Windows Workgroup

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 High Availability system checklist 29

or enter the real Windows Domain name if both servers in the High
Availability pair have already joined the customer domain.
However, Nortel recommends using the Windows default workgroup to
first configure the High Availability system, and then join the customer
domain after the High Availability system is working (if the system has
to join the domain).
• EMC AutoStart Domain Name—This is the unique name for the EMC
AutoStart domain. The EMC AutoStart domain name must be the same
for the pair of High Availability servers. This name must contain only
alphanumeric characters and must have a maximum length of eight
characters.

High Availability system checklist

Use the following table to plan and track the system settings for your High
Availability servers. These settings are configured using the CallPilot
Configuration Wizard and the High Availability Configuration Wizard.

Table 3
High Availability system checklist
CP Node 1 (CP1) CP Node 2 (CP2)
Configuration Wizard: Serial Number and Keycode page
Serial Number
Keycode
Configuration Wizard: Server Information page
Computer Name
Note: Must only include
alphanumeric characters.
Time Zone
Area Code
Country Code
LDAP Search Base
Configuration Wizard: Password Information page
Administrator password
Note: Both nodes must have
the same password.
Configuration Wizard: Switch Information page
Switch Type
Switch Customer Number
Switch IP Address

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
30 Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation

CP Node 1 (CP1) CP Node 2 (CP2)

Link1 TN
Link1 Key0
Link1 Key1
Link2 TN
Link2 Key0
Link2 Key1
Link3 TN
Link3 Key0
Link3 Key1
CDN
Configuration Wizard: Language Source Directory page
Primary language
Secondary language
Configuration Wizard: CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page
ELAN subnet IP address
ELAN subnet mask
Nortel server subnet (CLAN) IP
address
Nortel server subnet (CLAN)
subnet mask
Nortel server subnet (CLAN)
gateway IP address

Heartbeat 1 (HB1) IP address

Heartbeat 1 (HB1) subnet mask
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) IP address
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) subnet mask
Mirror IP address
Mirror subnet mask
High Availability Configuration Wizard
Managed CLAN Host Name
Note: The CLAN is the Nortel
server subnet.
Managed CLAN IP address

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Facility planning 31

CP Node 1 (CP1) CP Node 2 (CP2)

Managed ELAN IP address
Note: The ELAN is the ELAN
subnet.
Node 1 Host Name
Node 2 Host Name
Number of MPB96 Boards
User Name
Note: This is the
Administrator’s user name.
Server Workgroup/Domain
Name
EMC AutoStart Domain Name
CLAN Test IP

Facility planning
The location of the servers in a CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system
is limited by the length of the DS30X cables, which connect the High
Availability servers to the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 switch. The maximum
length of the DS30X cables is 60 feet or 18.29 meters long.
The two servers in the High Availability pair must be collocated, as they
must be connected to the same switch. Having the servers collocated lets
the servers take advantage of a common (customer-supplied) UPS if there
is one available.
The physical distance that can separate the two servers is limited by the
following:
• The length of the DS30X cables connecting the servers to the MGate
cards in the switch (maximum of 60 feet or 18.29 meters long).
• The requirement that the HB1, HB2, and Mirror network connections
between the two servers are connected using dedicated crossover LAN
cables with no networking hardware (that is, switches, routers, or hubs)
between the servers.
• The common grounding requirements for all hardware that is connected
to the switch. For grounding requirements, see the Planning and
Engineering Guide (NN44200-200).

Nortel recommends that the two servers be collocated to ensure that all of
these requirements are met.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
32 Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation

Switch planning
AML over Ethernet is the only switch integration that is supported.
Note: T1 connectivity is not supported.

For detailed switch information, see the following:

• Meridian 1 and CallPilot Server Configuration (NN44200-302)
• Communication Server 1000 and CallPilot Server Configuration
(NN44200-312)

Both servers must be connected to the same switch (using MGate cards
and DS30X cables). Because both servers are connected to the same
switch with their own dedicated DS30X cables, the switch must have twice
as many MGate cards installed than it would for a single CallPilot server. For
example, if a switch has a single 192-channel CallPilot server connected to
it, the switch must have six MGate cards installed. For a 192-channel High
Availability configuration, the switch must have 12 MGate cards installed
because six are required for each CallPilot server in the High Availability pair.
Each 1005r server has a dedicated connection to the switch, and therefore,
requires dedicated DS30X or CAT5 connections, MGate cards, and
matching switch configuration. Each 1006r server has a similar dedicated
connection to the switch but requires CAT5 connections, MGate cards, and
matching switch configuration.
Two configuration are supported:
1. Two servers, either 1005r or 1006r, with one MPB96 each (up to 96
channels).
For a 96-channel High Availability server, each server in the pair can
support 96 channels, which means there could be three MGate cards
per server for a total of 6 MGate cards.
2. Two servers, either 1005r or 1006r, with three MPB96 each (up to 192
channels).
For a 192-channel High Availability server, each server in the pair can
support 192 channels, which means there could be six MGate cards per
server for a total of 12 MGate cards.

Both High Availability servers must share the same CDN so that users do
not know which server in the pair is servicing requests.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Required hardware 33

Meridian 1 planning
For Meridian 1 Option 51/61/81 switches, the clock controller card
(QPC775c) must have vintage NTRB53AA or higher. This is required
to avoid a problem when the midnight audit runs on the switch and IP
connectivity is temporarily lost, which in turn causes the AutoStart software
to initiate a failover to the standby server.

CS 1000 planning
Media Gateway shelves in a CS 1000E do not share the same clock
reference. Media Gateway Expansion shelves share the same clock
reference as the Media Gateway shelf to which they are connected. In a CS
1000E, all MGate cards connected to the CallPilot server must reside in the
same Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion shelf pair.

ATTENTION
Each server in the High Availability pair must have all of its MGate connections in
the same Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion shelf pair on a CS 1000E.

For the CS 1000M and CS 1000S, the MGate cards can reside on separate
shelves.

Required hardware
The following checklists describe the contents required for a High Availability
system. Most items are included when you order the High Availability
feature; however, some items must be supplied by the customer. Ensure
you have all of the applicable items prior to beginning the installation of
the High Availability system.

Hardware included
When you order an High Availability system, the following hardware is
included:

Table 4
1005r High Availability system (up to 96 MPUs or 288 MPUs)
Included with system Qty PEC number
CallPilot 5.0 1005r Server 96 MPU Chassis 2 NTUB28CAE5
Sub-Assembly Package NTUB28DAE5
or
CallPilot 5.0 1005r Server 288 MPU Chassis
Sub-Assembly Package
CallPilot 5.0 Rackmount 1005r Server CD Image 2 NTUB50RA
Set
CallPilot 5.0 Common Software Components and 2 NTUB63CA
Documentation BOM

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
34 Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation

Included with system Qty PEC number

CallPilot 5.0 Keycode 1 N0119677
CallPilot 5.0 HA Feature Activation 1 NTZE64AA
EMC Software RTU License Royalty - R 2 N0119699
EMC License Registration Card 2 N0129528
Ghost Solution Suite 1.1 with CallPilot 5.0 2 N0119681
RTU for Symantec PCAnywhere v12.0 for New 2 N0119700
CallPilot Applications
RTU for Windows 2003 Document 2 P1013471
RTU for Crystal Decision (Report) 2 P0989628
RTU for DOS 6.20 Document 2 P0887449
RTU for SQL Anywhere 2 P0887451
CallPilot 1005r Storage Hours - 2400 Hours 1 NTZE08FA
CallPilot Prompt Languages - Activate Six 1 NTZE16AB
CallPilot Speech Activated Messaging 1 NTZE16BB
Vocabulary - Activate Three
Nortel Standard Security Device [RoHS] 1 NTDK57AAE5
CABLE ASSY, TRIPLE DS30X InterConnect 2 or 4 NTRH2014E6
Cable for MPB96
2 (for 96 MPUs) or 4 (for 288 MPUs)

Table 5
1006r High Availability system (up to 96 MPUs or 288 MPUs)
Included with system Qty PEC number
CallPilot 5.0 1006r Server 96 MPU Chassis Sub-Assembly 2 NTUB37AAE5
Package NTUB74AAE5
or
CallPilot 5.0 1006r Server 288 MPU Chassis Sub-Assembly
Package
CallPilot 5.0 Rackmount 1006r Server CD Image Set 2 NTUB50UA
CallPilot 5.0 Common Software Components and 2 NTUB63CA
Documentation BOM
CallPilot 5.0 Keycode 1 N0119677
CallPilot 5.0 HA Feature Activation 1 NTZE64AA
EMC Software RTU License Royalty - R 2 N0119699
EMC License Registration Card 2 N0129528
Ghost Solution Suite 1.1 with CallPilot 5.0 2 N0119681

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Required hardware 35

RTU for Symantec PCAnywhere v12.0 for New CallPilot 2 N0119700

Applications
RTU for Windows 2003 Document 2 P1013471
RTU for Crystal Decision (Report) 2 P0989628
RTU for DOS 6.20 Document 2 P0887449
RTU for SQL Anywhere 2 P0887451
CallPilot 1006r Storage Hours - 2400 Hours 1 NTZE08FA
CallPilot Prompt Languages - Activate Six 1 NTZE16AB
CallPilot Speech Activated Messaging Vocabulary - Activate 1 NTZE16BB
Three
Nortel Standard Security Device [RoHS] 1 NTDK57AAE5
CABLE ASSY, TRIPLE CAT5 InterConnect Cable for MPB96 2 or 4
2 (for 96 MPUs) or 4 (for 288 MPUs)

Customer provided equipment

The following table provides the list of equipment that must be supplied
by the customer.

Table 6
Customer provided equipment
Not included with system Qty PEC number Notes
Crossover cable 3 n/a Used to connect the
HB1, HB2, and Mirror
NICs.
1005r/1006r/600r/202i USB 2 NTRH9242E6 Used for remote
modem support. Each
server must have
a dedicated modem.
ELAN cable 2 n/a One for each 1005r
server.
CLAN cable 2 n/a One for each 1005r
server.

Supported hardware configurations

The CallPilot 5.0 High Availability feature is only supported on the 1005r or
1006r platform. Two identical servers are required for the High Availability
feature. A mixture of server types is not supported, therefore the High
Availability pair can only include two 1005r servers or two 1006r servers.
The pair of servers are required to provide the active and standby server
configuration.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
36 Chapter 3 Preparing for Installation

One dongle is shared between the pair of High Availability servers as they
share the same keycode and serial number.
The two supported hardware configurations are:
• three MPB96 boards (up to 192 channels/288 MPU) with two dual-port
NIC cards
• one MPB96 board (up to 96 channels/96 MPU) with two dual-port NIC
cards

Note: The hardware configuration must be identical on both servers

making up the High Availability pair.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 37

Chapter 4
Failover overview
In this chapter
"Introduction" (page 37)

"Automatic failovers" (page 38)

"Manual failovers" (page 39)

Introduction
In a High Availability system, one server is active while the other is in
standby mode. If a failure occurs on the active server, the standby server
comes into service, becoming the active server. The process of the standby
server becoming the active server is called a failover.
The standby server takes over from the active server when:
• A failure condition is detected on the active server and the software
triggers a failover to the standby server. This is known as an automatic
failover. For more information, see "Automatic failovers" (page 38).
• A manual failover is initiated by an administrator to perform maintenance
activities, or when there is degradation of service that is not detected
by the AutoStart software. For more information, see "Manual failovers"
(page 39).

In normal day-to-day use, end users are not aware that two CallPilot servers
are configured in a High Availability pair. There is one Control Directory
Number (CDN) configured on the switch that users call for any given
service. Any calls to a given CDN are routed to the CallPilot server that is
currently active.

Note: The CDNs configured on both server must be the same.

If a failover occurs, the standby CallPilot server becomes the active server
of the pair and the switch routes incoming calls to the active server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
38 Chapter 4 Failover overview

In case of a failover, where the standby server becomes the active server,
any calls or connections that were in process when the failover occurs are
dropped. The CallPilot server is out-of-service from the time the active
server fails to the time the standby server takes over. During the failover
process, when the standby server is coming into active service, neither
server is available to accept or process connections. This process takes
approximately 4 to 12 minutes (depending on the scenario). Calls coming
in during this time receive the default treatment that is configured on the
switch. After the standby server become the active server, end users can
connect with the CallPilot server without changing any settings.

Automatic failovers
An automatic failover occurs when the AutoStart software determines that
something has gone wrong on the active CallPilot server, that is, a critical
CallPilot service has failed. The software initiates a failover to the standby
CallPilot server without any user interaction. Only a limited number of
automatic failover cases are supported in CallPilot 5.0.
The following cases trigger an automatic failover from the active CallPilot
server to the standby server:
• A reboot or shut down of the active server.
• Failure of one or more of the critical CallPilot services. The system
attempts to restart a failed critical CallPilot service three times before
resorting to a failover. These critical services include:

Table 7
Critical CallPilot services
Service name Description
Adaptive Server Anywhere - DB_SQLANY Database service
CallPilot AOS Service Active Operation Server (AOS) Service
CallPilot HAL Monitor Monitors the Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL)
CallPilot LDAP Service Directory server used to set and retrieve the
most persistent data except for messages and
prompts
CallPilot Multimedia Volume 1 Data management for users, messages, and so
on, stored in volume VS1 (VS1T, VS1V, and
VS1B)
CallPilot Multimedia Volume 102 Data management for users, messages, and so
on, stored in volume VS102 (VS102T, VS102V,
and VS102B)
CallPilot Multimedia Volume 103 Data management for users, messages, and so
on, stored in volume VS103 (VS103T, VS103V,
and VS103B)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Manual failovers 39

Service name Description

CallPilot Multimedia Cache Cache for multimedia volumes 1, 102, and 103.
CallPilot Resource Package 1 Middleware resources for MPB board 1
CallPilot Resource Package 2 Middleware resources for MPB board 2
CallPilot Resource Package 3 Middleware resources for MPB board 3
CallPilot Blue Call Router Routes calls to the CallPilot Blue application
CallPilot Call Channel Router Telephony channel delivers the voice path of
the call
CallPilot SLEE Service Service Logic Execution Environment (SLEE)
CallPilot Notification Service Event notification service
CallPilot MTA Service Message Transfer Agent (MTA)
CallPilot MWI Service Message Waiting Indication (MWI)

• Optional automatic failover on the loss of connection of the ELAN at

the TCP/IP level (that is, failure of the switch to respond to the ping
command of the Managed ELAN IP address for a specified period of
time). By default, there is no failover on the Path Test failure of the
Managed ELAN IP address, which CallPilot 5.0 High Availability servers
use to connect to the switch through ELAN. However, the CallPilot 5.0
High Availability system sends a notification e-mail to the administrators
when the Path Test failure of the Managed ELAN IP occurs. If necessary,
you can also set up the failover on the failure of the Managed ELAN IP
address by following the procedure "Configuring failovers on the Path
Test failures of the Managed ELAN IP address" (page 194).

Using the AutoStart console software, you can disable and enable automatic
failovers. For more information, see the following procedures:
• "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218)
• "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)" (page 219)

Manual failovers
A manual failover occurs when the server administrator decides to initiate
a failure manually using the AutoStart Console. Failovers can also be
manually triggered by powering down the active server. The actual failover
mechanism is the same as in the automatic case; the only difference is
that the failover is manually initiated.
The administrator can choose to perform a manual switchover if there is
a problem on the active CallPilot server that is not part of the automatic
failover rules. A manual failover can be initiated for the following situations:
• For hardware repairs of failed hardware in the server that requires the
server to be powered down (for example, failure of an internal fan)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
40 Chapter 4 Failover overview

• For service improvement due to an end-user-reported degradation of

service on the server
• For scheduled maintenance

To perform a manual failover, see "Initiating a manual failover" (page 220).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 41

Chapter 5
Install and configure the High
Availability pair
In this chapter
"New system installation procedure" (page 41)

"Prepare the switch and install the 1005r or 1006r servers" (page 44)

"Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers" (page 45)

"Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard" (page 54)

"Connect and verify LAN connections" (page 75)

"Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check CP1

and CP2 configuration " (page 82)

"Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software " (page 86)

"Configure the AutoStart software" (page 106)

"Bring the Resource Groups online" (page 119)

"Test your configuration" (page 124)

"Create the CallPilot Reporter connections" (page 125)

"Add the servers to a Windows domain" (page 127)

New system installation procedure

This chapter describes how to perform a fresh installation of High Availability
servers and how to configure the pair of CallPilot High Availability servers.
In this NTP, the administrator installs and configures the CallPilot server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
42 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

This installation assumes the following:

• The CallPilot 5.0 image on the 1005r or 1006r server was installed at
the factory.
• The additional hardware (two dual-port NIC cards) was installed at the
factory.
• The AutoStart software is not installed as part of the CallPilot 5.0 image.
The software must be installed by the customer as part of the High
Availability installation.

A CallPilot High Availability system consists of two servers that work as

peers. At any time, one server is active while the other server is in standby
mode. For the purpose of the following procedure, the servers are referred
to as CallPilot server 1 (CP1) and CallPilot server 2 (CP2). Initially, CP1 is
the active server and CP2 is the standby server.

ATTENTION
The following table outlines the tasks required to install, configure, and test the
High Availability feature.
The tasks (and procedures within each task) must be completed in the order
presented.

Table 8
High Availability task list
Task Estimated time Procedures required to complete the task
Prepare the switch 60 minutes – "Preparing the switch" (page 44)
Install the two servers 210 minutes per – "Installing the two 1005r or 1006r servers" (page
server 45)
Prepare both servers 120 minutes per – "Manually changing the server name" (page
server 46) (optional)
– "Manually setting the IP parameters" (page
47) (optional)
– "Installing the antivirus software" (page
48) (optional)
– "Running the CallPilot Setup Wizard" (page 49)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 New system installation procedure 43

Task Estimated time Procedures required to complete the task

Configure CP1 and 40 minutes per – "Configuring the replacement server using the
CP2 using the CallPilot server based CallPilot Configuration Wizard" (page 54)
Configuration Wizard on two installed
– "Configuring CP2 using the CallPilot
languages and
Configuration Wizard" (page 70)
three provisioned
channels
Allow 10 minutes
for each additional
language
Connect and verify the 30 minutes – "Connecting and verifying LAN connections"
LAN connections (page 76)
– "Modifying the hosts file" (page 80) (optional)
– "Testing the host name resolution" (page 82)
Run Stage 1 of the High 5 minutes – "Running Stage 1 of the High Availability
Availability Configuration Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2
Wizard to check the configuration" (page 83)
configuration of CP1 and
CP2
Install the AutoStart 5.2.2 10 minutes – "Installing the AutoStart Agent and Console
software on CP1 software on CP1" (page 86)
Configure licensing and 10 minutes – "Add the node 2 administrator account to the
security on CP1 AutoStart Console on node 1" (page 94)
Install the AutoStart 5.2.2 10 minutes – "Installing the AutoStart Agent and Console
software on CP2 software on CP2" (page 96)
Configure the AutoStart 35 minutes Configure the AutoStart software on CP1
software
– "Modifying the AutoStart Domain and Verification
Note: All configuration is links" (page 106)
completed on CP1.
– "Adding the Remote Mirroring Host for CP2"
(page 109)
– "Generating the AutoStart Definition File" (page
112)
Import the AutoStart definition file on CP1
– "Importing the AutoStart definition file" (page 114)
Add the Windows administrator password for the
AutoStart utility processes in the AutoStart Console
– "Adding the Windows administrator account
password for the AutoStart Utility Processes"
(page 115)
Add e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP
_Failure_Notif rule

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
44 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Task Estimated time Procedures required to complete the task

– "Adding e-mail addresses to the

Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule"
(page 117)
Bring the Resource 10 minutes – "Bringing the CallPilot Resource Group online
Groups online on CP1" (page 119)
– "Bringing the Resource Groups CallPilot_[CP1]
and CallPilot_[CP2] online" (page 122)
Test your configuration 120 minutes – "Testing the configuration of CP1 and CP2"
(page 124)
Create the CallPilot 20 minutes – "Creating the CallPilot Reporter connection"
Reporter connections (page 126)
Add server to a Windows 30 minutes – "Joining a Windows domain" (page 127)
domain (if required)

Prepare the switch and install the 1005r or 1006r servers

Before you install and configure the High Availability feature you must
prepare the switch and servers. Use the following procedures to prepare
the switch and install the servers.

Preparing the switch

Step Action

1 Configure the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 switch by referring to the

following documents:
• Meridian 1 and CallPilot Server Configuration (NN44200-302)
• Communication Server 1000 and CallPilot Server Configuration
(NN44200-312)

Note: Both High Availability servers must use the same Control
Directory Number (CDN). The MGate cards on the switch must
provide twice the channel capacity than that of a single High
Availability server. However, only half the channels are in use at
any one time (the other half of the channels are in standby mode).

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers 45

Installing the two 1005r or 1006r servers

Step Action

1 Refer to 1005r Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r

Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-320) and Installation and
Configuration Task List (NN44200-306) for details about performing
the following tasks:
a. Unpack both of the CP1 and CP2 servers.
b. Install the dongle on CP1.
c. Connect the peripheral equipment (monitor, keyboard, and
mouse) to both servers.
d. Connect USB modems to each server.
e. Power on both servers.
Result: The servers start and the Windows 2003 Mini-Setup
runs. (During the Windows 2003 Mini-Setup, the servers
automatically restart twice.)

—End—

Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers

The following procedures can be required depending upon your setup
configuration.
• Manually change the server name. (The CallPilot Configuration Wizard
can also be used to change the server name.)
• Manually set the IP parameters. (The CallPilot Configuration Wizard can
also be used to set the IP parameters.)
Note: The procedures listed in the preceding bullets are performed
under the following circumstances:
1. If you are restoring from a network location. In order to perform a
restore the CLAN IP address must first be set.
2. If you are using a DNS as part of your network solution, then the
DNS entries must be manually completed.

• Check the Primary DNS suffix.

• Install antivirus software on both servers. (optional)
Note: For more information about the antivirus software packages
that are approved by Nortel for CallPilot, see the P-2007-0101-Global
: CallPilot Support for Anti-Virus Applications bulletin.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
46 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

• Run the CallPilot Setup Wizard

Manually changing the server name

Step Action
Changing the server name can also be done using the CallPilot
Configuration Wizard.

1 Log on to the server with the default administrator user name and
password (administrator / Bvw250).

2 Right-click My Computer and select Properties from the shortcut

menu.
Result: The System Properties window appears.

3 Select the Computer name tab.

4 Click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.

5 In Computer Name field, enter new computer name.

ATTENTION
The computer name must contain only alphanumeric characters.
Nonalphanumeric characters (such as a hyphen [-]), are not supported.

6 Click OK.
Result: A warning message appears prompting you to restart the
computer for the changes to take effect.

7 Click OK.
Result: The System Properties window appears.

8 Click OK.
Result: A message appears prompting you to restart the computer.
9 Click Yes to restart the computer.
Result: The system restarts.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers 47

Manually setting the IP parameters

Step Action
Setting the IP parameter can also be done using the CallPilot Configuration
Wizard; however, DNS entries and Mirror network interface must be
manually configured

1 Select Start > Settings > Network Connections.

Result: The Network Connections window appears and displays a
list of network connections.

2 Right-click CLAN and select Properties.

Result: The CLAN Properties window appears.
3 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.
Result: The TCP/IP Properties window appears.

4 Enter the following IP information (which is provided by the network

administrator):
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
• Preferred DNS server
• Alternate DNS server

Note: The DNS entries cannot be configured using the CallPilot

Configuration Wizard. The DNS entries must be manually
configured.

5 Click OK.
Result: The CLAN Properties window appears.
6 Click Close.

7 Repeat the preceding steps for the ELAN, HB1, HB2, and Mirror
network interfaces.
8 Right-click MIRROR and select Properties.
Result: General tab of the MIRROR Properties window opens

9 Only the "Internet Protocol TCP/IP" protocol should be bound to

the interface. Uncheck all other items in the list “This connection
uses the following items”.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
48 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Result: “Internet Protocol TCP/IP” item is enabled; "Client for

Microsoft Networks", "File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft
Networks", “Network Load Balancing” options are disabled

10 Select the "Internet Protocol TCP/IP" item and click Properties.

Result: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
11 Click Advanced button at the bottom of the window.
Result: Advanced TCP/IP Settings window opens

12 Select WINS tab. Uncheck all options except “Disable NetBIOS

over TCP/IP".
Result: The item “Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP" is checked. The
option “Enable LMHOSTS lookup” is unchecked.
13 Click OK at the bottom of Advanced TCP/IP Settings window.
Result: Advanced TCP/IP Settings window closes.

14 Click OK at the bottom of Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

window.
Result: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window closes.
15 Click Close at the bottom of MIRROR Properties window.
Result: MIRROR Properties window closes.

—End—

Installing the antivirus software

Step Action
This procedure is optional.

1 For information about the antivirus software packages that are

approved by Nortel for CallPilot, see the P-2007-0101-Global :
CallPilot Support for Anti-Virus Applications bulletin.

2 Install the antivirus software on the CallPilot servers.

The Antivirus software must be configured to exclude the AutoStart
Database directory to ensure uninterrupted processing. The path to
the AutoStart Database directory is:
D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart<AutoStart-Domain-
Name>\<AutoStart-Domain-Name_NodeName>
See the P-2007-0101-Global : CallPilot Support for Anti-Virus
Applications bulletin for detailed instructions on how to exclude
the AutoStart Database directory on CallPilot 5.0 High Availability
systems.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers 49

—End—

Running the CallPilot Setup Wizard

Step Action
The CallPilot Setup Wizard must be run on both CP1 and CP2.

1 Log on to the CallPilot server.

The default password for the administrator account is Bvw250.
Result: When you first log on to the system after powering it up, the
Setup Wizard runs automatically. If the Setup Wizard does not open,
launch the Setup Wizard by clicking Start > Programs > CallPilot >
Setup Wizard.
Result: The Welcome to the CallPilot Setup Wizard window
appears.
Figure 3
CallPilot Setup Wizard: Welcome window

2 Click Next.
Result: The Service Update (SU) / PEP Installation window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
50 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 4
Service Update (SU) / PEP Installation window

3 Select one of the following options:

• If you have SUs or PEPs to install, select the Yes, I have
updates that I want to install now option.
SUs and PEPs are found in the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library
(ESPL) at the following Web site: www.nortel.com/espl
Result: The Installing SU/PEP screen appears. Install the
required updates and restart if necessary.
• If there are no SUs or PEPs to install, select the No, I do not
have updates that I want to install now option.

4 Click Next.
Result: The Performing Platform Validity Check window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers 51

Figure 5
Performing Platform Validity Check window

5 View the items on the Performing Platform Validity Check screen.

Note: If your server does not meet the minimum hardware and
software requirements, contact your support organization.

6 Click Next.
Result: The Telephony Board Validation window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
52 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 6
Telephony Board Validation window

7 If your board configuration is correct, click Next.

Result: The Selecting Upgrade of CallPilot window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Prepare both 1005r or 1006r servers 53

Figure 7
Selecting Upgrade of CallPilot window

8 Select the No, I do not have data to restore option.

9 Click Next.
Result: The Finished window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
54 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 8
Finished window

10 Click Finish to exit the CallPilot Setup Wizard.

—End—

Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard

This section provides the procedures to configure CP1 and CP2 using the
CallPilot Configuration Wizard within CallPilot Manager.

ATTENTION
If you must go back into the Configuration Wizard at any time to correct any
entries, note that the Database, LDAP, and AOS services must be started to gain
access to CallPilot Manager.
The D:\Nortel\HA folder contains a file called start_svr.bat that automatically starts
any necessary services. This script can be run to start the required services.

Configuring the replacement server using the CallPilot Configuration

Wizard
Step Action
Time required: 20 minutes (assuming one language is installed)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 55

ATTENTION
Ensure that the dongle is installed on the replacement server.

1 Launch the Internet Explorer Web browser.

2 In the address field, enter the following URL to start CallPilot

Manager: http://localhost/cpmgr

3 Log on to CallPilot Manager using the administrator mailbox and

default password created from the CallPilot Setup Wizard:
a. Under the User area, enter the following:
• The administrator mailbox number is 000000.
• The default password is 124578.

b. Under the Server area, enter the localhost in the Server field.
Note: All administrative changes must be performed on active
server with dongle attached.

Figure 9
CallPilot Manger Login page

4 Click Login.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
56 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Result: The Change User Password window appears.

Figure 10
Change User Password

5 Change the password for the 000000 administrator mailbox by doing

the following:
a. Enter the Current Password.
b. Enter the New Password.
c. Reenter the new password in the New Password Re-Entry field.
d. Click Save.
Result: The Welcome to CallPilot Manager page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 57

Figure 11
Welcome to CallPilot Manager page

6 Click Configuration Wizard.

Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
58 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 12
Configuration Wizard: Welcome page

7 Click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 59

Figure 13
Configuration Wizard: Keycode and serial number page

8 Enter the following:

a. In the Serial number field, enter the serial number of the dongle
assigned to the CallPilot server. The serial number entered for
the replacement server must be the same as the serial number
entered for the existing server.
b. In the Keycode field, enter the High Availability-enabled keycode
assigned to CallPilot server. The keycode entered for the
replacement server must be the same as the keycode entered
for the existing server.
9 Click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
60 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 14
Configuration Wizard: Feature Verification page

10 Ensure that all parameters are correct and that the High Availability
feature is set to Mirroring.

11 Click Next.
Result: The Server Information page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 61

Figure 15
Configuration Wizard: Server Information

12 On the Server Information page, do the following:

a. In the Computer Name field, enter the CallPilot server name.
b. In the Time Zone field, select the correct time zone.
c. Under Dialing Information, enter the Area Code and Country
Code.
d. Enter the LDAP search base. For example, dc=nortel,dc=ca.
Note: All values on the Server Information page for the
replacement server must be the same as for the existing server.
Use Table 3 "High Availability system checklist" (page 29) that
you completed for both nodes.

13 Click Next option.

Result: The Password Information page appears and the Change
the password option is selected.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
62 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 16
Password Information

14 On the Password Information page, do the following:

a. In the New Password field, enter the new password.
b. In the Confirm the new password field, reenter the new
password.
c. Click Next.
Result: A warning message appears.
Figure 17
Change password warning message

15 Click OK to dismiss the warning message.

Result: The Password Information page reappears.

16 Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 63

17 Configure the MPB96 settings.

18 Click Next.
Result: The M1 Switch Information page appears.
Figure 18
Configuration Wizard: M1 Switch Information page

19 Configure the switch information.

a. Select the Switch Type.
b. Enter the Switch Customer Number.
c. Enter the Switch IP Address.
See the Table 3 "High Availability system checklist" (page
29) containing the information for both nodes.
d. Provision the channels, as follows:
i. Select a channel.
Result: The Channel Detail window appears.
ii. Enter the TN, ACD Position ID, and SCN.
iii. Ensure that Channel Allocation is set to Multimedia.
iv. Click OK.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
64 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Result: The Meridian 1 Switch Information window appears

again.
v. Continue the provisioning of channels until complete.
Note 1: To automatically provision a number of channels,
you can enter the information for one channel, select the
number of channels required, and then click Fill. The
Configuration Wizard automatically datafills the channels,
and increments the TNs, ACD Position ID, and SCN.
Note 2: The number of TNs configured on both nodes must
be the same.

Note: To obtain switch-provisioning information, see Table 3

"High Availability system checklist" (page 29).

20 Click Next.
Result: The Meridian 1 CDN Information page appears.
Figure 19
Configuration Wizard: Meridian 1 CDN Information page

21 Click New to add a new CDN.

Result: The CDN Details page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 65

ATTENTION
The CDNs must be the same on both nodes.

22 On the CDN Details page, do the following:

a. In the CDN field, enter the new CDN.
b. Select the Application Name (Voice Messaging or Multimedia
Messaging).
c. Click OK.
Result: The new CDN is added and the CDN information page
reappears.
23 Click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory page appears.
Figure 20
Configuration Wizard: Language Source Directory

24 Insert the CallPilot 5.0 Language CD into the CD/DVD drive on the
replacement server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
66 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

ATTENTION
You must use a CallPilot 5.0 Language CD.
Language CDs from previous CallPilot releases are not compatible
with CallPilot 5.0. The Configuration Wizard checks the version of the
Language CD and blocks the use of the CD if it is not a CallPilot 5.0 CD.

25 On the Language Source Directory Select page, do the following:

a. Select the Install Language option.
b. In the Language CD Location field, enter the directory location
of the Language disk or file. Typically, CallPilot uses drive Z
(therefore, enter Z:).
26 Click Next.
Result: The Language Installation page appears.
27 On the Language Installation page, do the following:
a. Select Languages and Automated Speech recognition to be
installed.
b. Select Primary and Secondary Languages.
Note: The Secondary Language is optional.

ATTENTION
The same languages must be installed on both nodes.

28 Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 67

Figure 21
Configuration Wizard: CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page
(upper portion of page)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
68 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 22
Configuration Wizard: CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page
(lower portion of page)

29 On the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page, do the following:

a. Select the network interface card from the drop-down list.
Result: The MAC address, IP address, and Subnet mask values
are updated for the network interface card.
b. Change the ELAN and CLAN IP information (IP address and
Subnet Mask).
c. Select the High Availability mode check box to display the High
Availability Network Interfaces.
Note: To enable High Availability, a proper keycode is
required and the High Availability Mode check box must
be selected. The keycode has the ability to enable High
Availability; however, the feature does not have to be enabled
and can be done at a later date.

d. Enter IP information for the HB1, HB2, and MIRROR network

interface cards.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 69

The following table shows the suggested default values for HB1,
HB2, and MIRROR on CP1. If you do not use these suggested
values, ensure that you use your new values throughout the
configuration.

Network Interface Card (NIC) IP Address Subnet Mask

Heartbeat 1 (HB1) 192.0.0.10 255.255.255.0
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) 194.0.0.10 255.255.255.0
MIRROR 193.0.0.10 255.255.255.0

30 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure page appears.
Figure 23
Configuration Wizard: Ready to Configure

31 Click Finish to start process.

Result: The system starts the configuration process and the
Progress Information screen appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
70 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 24
Progress Information page

32 After the process is complete, restart the CallPilot server.

—End—

Configuring CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard

Step Action
Time required: 20 minutes (assuming one language is installed)
The dongle does not have to be moved from CP1 to CP2 to run the
Configuration wizard on CP2. Using a High Availability-enabled keycode,
the Configuration wizard can be run on CP2.

1 Launch a supported Internet Web browser on CP2.

2 In the address field, enter the following URL to start CallPilot

Manager: http://localhost/cpmgr
3 Log on to CallPilot Manager using the administrator mailbox and
default password created from the CallPilot Setup Wizard:
a. Under the User area, enter the following:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 71

• The administrator mailbox number is 000000.

• The default password is 124578.

b. Under the Server area, enter the localhost in the Server field.
4 Click Login.
Result: The Change User Password screen appears.

5 Change the password for the 000000 mailbox by doing the following:
a. Enter the Current Password.
b. Enter the New Password.
c. Reenter the new password in the New Password Re-Entry field.
d. Click Save.
Result: The Welcome to CallPilot Manager page appears.

6 Click Configuration Wizard.

Result: The Configuration Wizard Welcome Back page appears.
7 Click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number page appears.

8 Enter the following:

a. In the Serial Number field, enter the serial number of the dongle
assigned to the CallPilot server. The serial number entered for
CP2 must be the same as the serial number entered for CP1.
b. In the Key Code field, enter the High Availability-enabled
keycode assigned to CallPilot server. The keycode entered for
CP2 must be the same as the keycode entered for CP1.
9 Click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification page appears.

10 Ensure that all parameters are correct and that the High Availability
feature says Mirroring.
11 Click Next.
Result: The Server Information page appears.

12 Do the following:
a. In the Computer Name field, enter the CallPilot server name.
b. In the Time Zone field, select the correct time zone.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
72 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

c. Under Dialing Information, enter the area code and country

code.
d. Enter the LDAP Search Base. For example, dc=nortel,dc=ca.
Note: All values on the Server Information page for CP2 must
be the same as CP1. Use Table 3 "High Availability system
checklist" (page 29) that you completed for both CP1 and CP2.

13 Click Next option.

Result: The Password Information page appears and the Change
the password option is selected.
14 On the Password Information page, do the following:
a. In the New Password field, enter the new password.
b. In the Confirm the new password field, reenter the new
password.
c. Click Next.
Result: A warning message appears.

15 Click OK to dismiss the warning message.

Result: The Password Information page reappears.
16 Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation page appears.

17 Configure the MPB96 settings.

18 Click Next.
Result: The M1 Switch Information page appears.
19 Configure the switch information.
a. Select the Switch Type. The Switch Type for CP2 must be the
same as CP1.
b. Enter the Switch Customer Number. The Switch Customer
Number for CP2 must be the same as CP1.
c. Enter the Switch IP Address. The Switch IP Address for CP2
must be the same as CP1.
See Table 3 "High Availability system checklist" (page
29) containing the information for both the CP1 and CP2 nodes.
d. Provision the channels, as follows:
i. Select a channel.
Result: The Channel Detail window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure CP1 and CP2 using the CallPilot Configuration Wizard 73

ii. Enter the TN, ACD Position ID, and SCN.

iii. Ensure that Channel Allocation is set to Multimedia.
iv. Click OK.
Result: The Meridian 1 Switch Information window appears
again.
v. Continue the provisioning of channels until complete.
Note: To automatically provision a number of channels, you
can enter the information for one channel, select the number
of channels required, and then click Fill. The Configuration
Wizard automatically datafills the channels, and increments
the TNs, ACD Position ID, and SCN.
The number of TNs configured on CP2 must be the same as
the number configured on CP1.

Note: This is the CP2 switch-provisioning information for the

switch. To obtain the CP2 switch-provisioning information, see
the completed Table 3 "High Availability system checklist" (page
29).

20 Click Next.
Result: The Meridian 1 CDN Information page appears.

21 Click New to add a new CDN.

Result: The CDN Details page appears.

22 On the CDN Details page, do the following:

a. In the CDN field, enter the new CDN.
Note: The CDN for CP2 must be the same as the CDN
configured on CP1.

b. Select the Application Name (Voice Messaging or Multimedia

Messaging).
c. Click OK.
Result: The new CDN is added and the CDN information page
reappears.

23 Click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory page appears.

24 Insert the CallPilot 5.0 Language CD in to the CD/DVD drive on

CP2.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
74 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

ATTENTION
You must use a CallPilot 5.0 Language CD.
Language CDs from previous CallPilot releases are not compatible
with CallPilot 5.0. The Configuration Wizard checks the version of the
Language CD and blocks the use of the CD if it is not a CallPilot 5.0 CD.

25 On the Language Source Directory Select page, do the following:

a. Select Install Language.
b. In the Language CD Location field, enter the directory of the
Language disk or file. Typically, CallPilot uses drive Z.
26 Click Next.
Result: The Language Installation page appears.

27 On the Language Installation page, do the following:

a. Select Languages and Automated Speech recognition to be
installed.
b. Select Primary and Secondary Languages.
Note: The Secondary Language is optional.

ATTENTION
The same languages must be installed on CP1 and CP2.

28 Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page appears.

29 On the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page, do the following:

a. Select the network interface card from the drop-down list.
Result: The MAC address, IP address, and Subnet mask values
are updated for the network interface card.
b. Change the ELAN and CLAN IP information (IP address and
Subnet Mask).
c. Select the High Availability mode check box to display the High
Availability Network Interfaces.
Note: To enable High Availability, a proper keycode is
required and the High Availability Mode check box must
be selected. The keycode has the ability to enable High
Availability; however, the feature does not have to be enabled
as it can be done at a later date.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Connect and verify LAN connections 75

d. Enter IP information for the HB1, HB2, and MIRROR network

interfaces cards.
The following table shows the suggested default values for HB1,
HB2, and MIRROR on CP2. If you do not use these suggested
values, ensure that you use your new values throughout the
configuration.

Network Interface Card (NIC) IP Address Subnet Mask

Heartbeat 1 (HB1) 192.0.0.11 255.255.255.0
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) 194.0.0.11 255.255.255.0
MIRROR 193.0.0.11 255.255.255.0

30 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure page appears.

31 Click Finish to start process.

Result: The system starts the configuration process and displays
its progress.

32 After the process is complete, restart the CallPilot server.

—End—

Connect and verify LAN connections

Use the following figure and procedure to connect the HB1, HB2, and
MIRROR crossover LAN cables, and the ELAN and CLAN cables between
the two High Availability servers.
Figure 25
Rear panel of 1005r server showing LAN connections

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
76 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 26
Rear panel of 1006r server showing LAN connections

Connecting and verifying LAN connections

Step Action

ATTENTION
Do not change the names of default network connections (ELAN, CLAN,
MIRROR, HB1, and HB2) created after High Availability servers installation.

1 On CP1 and CP2, select Start > Settings > Network Connections.
Result: The Network Connection window appears and shows that
the HB1, HB2, MIRROR, ELAN, and CLAN connections are not
connected.
Figure 27
Network Connections - no connections

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Connect and verify LAN connections 77

2 Connect the HB1 crossover LAN cable between both the CP1 and
CP2 servers.

3 In the Network Connections window, verify that HB1 shows that it is

connected.
Result: The red X is removed from the HB1 icon, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 28
Network Connections - HB1 connected

4 To ensure that the HB1 cable is properly connected, perform the

following from CP1:
a. Open a command prompt.
b. Enter the command tracert –d 192.0.0.11 to verify the HB1
connection.
Note: If you are not using the default values for the heartbeat
connections, enter tracert -d <IP address of HB1 on CP2>.

c. Confirm that server CP2 can be reached in one hop.

5 Connect the HB2 crossover LAN cable between both the CP1 and
CP2 servers.

6 In the Network Connections window, verify that HB2 shows that it is

connected.
Result: The red X is removed from the HB2 icon.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
78 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

7 To ensure that the HB2 cable is properly connected, perform the

following from CP1:
a. Open a command prompt.
b. Enter the command tracert –d 194.0.0.11 to verify the HB2
connection.
Note: If you are not using the default values for the heartbeat
connections, enter tracert -d <IP address of HB2 on CP2>.

c. Confirm that server CP2 can be reached in one hop.

8 Connect the MIRROR crossover LAN cable between both the CP1
and CP2 servers.

9 In the Network Connections window, verify that MIRROR shows

that it is connected.
Result: The red X is removed from the MIRROR icon.
10 To ensure that the MIRROR cable is properly connected, perform
the following from CP1:
a. Open a command prompt.
b. Enter the command tracert –d 193.0.0.11 to verify the MIRROR
connection.
Note: If you are not using the default values for the heartbeat
connections, enter tracert -d <IP address of Mirror on CP2>.

c. Confirm that server CP2 can be reached in one hop.

11 Connect the ELAN cable.

12 In the Network Connections window, verify that ELAN shows that

it is connected.
Result: The red X is removed from the ELAN icon.
13 To ensure that the ELAN is properly connected, perform the following
from CP1:
a. Open a command prompt.
b. Verify that the switch is accessible by running the following
command: ping <switch IP address>
c. Verify that CP2 is accessible by running the following command:
ping <CP2 ELAN IP address>

14 Connect the CLAN cable.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Connect and verify LAN connections 79

15 In the Network Connections window, verify that CLAN shows that

it is connected.
Result: The red X is removed from the CLAN icon.

16 To ensure that the CLAN is properly connected, perform the following

from CP1:
a. Open a command prompt.
b. Verify that the default gateway is accessible by running the
following command: ping <CLAN/Nortel server subnet default
gateway IP address>
c. Verify that CP2 is accessible by running the following command:
ping <CP2 CLAN IP address>

17 Check the Network Connections window and ensure that all

connections are made.
Result: No red Xs appear on any of the icons (as shown in the
following figure).
Figure 29
Network Connections - all connections made

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
80 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Modifying the hosts file

Step Action
This procedure is required if a DNS server is not used in the network
solution or part of the configuration (in particular, where IP address name
resolution is preferred). Use the following procedure to resolve the Managed
CLAN IP address (virtual CLAN IP address).

1 On your <server or client PC>, perform the following steps:

a. Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the following folder:
C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc
b. Double-click the hosts file.
Result: The Open with window appears.
Figure 30
Open With window

c. Select Notepad.
d. Click OK.
Result: The Notepad application appears and displays the hosts
file information.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Connect and verify LAN connections 81

e. Save a copy of the hosts file (as a backup) before you modify
the file.
f. Place the cursor at a new line directly underneath the default
entry 127.0.0.1.
g. Enter the Managed CLAN IP address.
For more information, see Table 3 "High Availability system
checklist" (page 29).
h. Press the Tab key until cursor is underneath the default localhost
and enter the Managed CLAN Host Name for the associated
Managed CLAN IP address that was just entered.
Figure 31
hosts file

i. Press the Enter key to go to next line.

Note: If a DNS server is used as a solution, ensure Network
Administrator has the entries entered into the DNS server
configuration.

—End—

Use the following procedure to test the host name resolution.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
82 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Testing the host name resolution

Step Action
This procedure is an example of how to test the host name for CP1 and
CP2 if the Managed CLAN host name has been added to their respective
host files.

1 On CP1, do the following:

a. Select Start > Run.
Result: The Run window appears.
b. In the Open field, type cmd.
Result: The DOS Command Prompt appears.
c. Enter the following command: ping <CP2 CLAN Host Name>
Result: If the CLAN is properly connected and the host file is
configured with the IP address and host name information, a
reply is displayed showing the Managed CLAN IP address and
the time to return.
d. Repeat (if necessary) with other host names from CP2.

2 On CP2, repeat the preceding steps.

—End—

Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check

CP1 and CP2 configuration
The High Availability Configuration Wizard is run twice during the
configuration of a High Availability server pair:
• Stage 1: The High Availability Configuration Wizard is run for the first
time to gather and verify the configuration of the two nodes in the High
Availability pair. This is done to ensure that the nodes are correctly
configured (for example, to ensure that the networking information is
consistent between the two nodes). For more information, see "Running
Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and
CP2 configuration" (page 83).
• Stage 2: The High Availability Configuration Wizard is run a second
time to verify the AutoStart software installation and to generate the
definition file that is imported into the AutoStart Console to provide the
initial configuration. For more information, see "Generating the AutoStart
Definition File" (page 112).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration 83

Running Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check

CP1 and CP2 configuration
Step Action
The High Availability Configuration Wizard is only run on CP1.

1 Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the D:\Nortel\HA folder.

2 Double-click the HighAvailabilityConfigurationWizard.exe file.

Result: The High Availability Configuration Wizard appears.
Figure 32
High Availability Configuration Wizard

3 Enter the following information based on the server configuration.

This information is completed in Table 3 "High Availability system
checklist" (page 29):
a. Managed CLAN Host Name: Enter the Host Name of the
Managed CLAN.
b. Managed CLAN IP: Enter the IP address of the Managed CLAN.
c. Managed ELAN IP: Enter the IP address of the Managed ELAN.
d. Node 1 Host Name: The Node 1 Host Name is initialized to the
name of the server on which the High Availability Configuration
Wizard is run. The Host Name is the name of the first CallPilot
server (CP1) in the High Availability pair.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
84 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

e. Node 2 Host Name: Enter the Host Name of the second

CallPilot server (CP2) in the High Availability pair.
f. Number of MPB96 boards: Enter the number of MPB96 boards
installed in the server.
g. User name: Enter the user name of the administrator account.
h. Server Workgroup / Domain Name: Enter the name of the
Windows workgroup or Windows domain in which the CallPilot
servers belong.
i. EMC AutoStart Domain Name: Enter the domain name of the
AutoStart domain.
The Domain Name must be a unique name and is used as the
AutoStart domain for the pair of CallPilot servers. This name
must contain only alphanumeric characters and have a maximum
length of eight characters. The domain name must be the same
domain name that was used in the High Availability Configuration
Wizard.
Note: This document uses [AutoStart_Domain]. This value
must be replaced with your AutoStart domain name.

j. CLAN Test IP: Enter the IP address on the CLAN to be used

to verify the CLAN connection. The IP address must be of a
device that responds to the ping command. If there is no CLAN
connection, enter the loopback IP address (127.0.0.1).

4 Click the Step 1: Get Node Information button to retrieve

information from the two servers in the High Availability pair.
• If there are any errors, a dialog box is displayed with the error
details. If the Configuration Wizard is unable to communicate
with either of the servers, verify that both servers have all the
network cables connected and that the administrator account
passwords are the same on both servers.
• If there are no errors, the Configuration Wizard is updated
with the information from the servers and the Validate Node
Information button is enabled.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration 85

Figure 33
Node Information displayed in bottom pane

5 Click the Step 2: Validate Node Information button to check

that the configuration of the two servers in the pair match. The
Validate Node Information button checks the format of the entered
IP addresses, pings the HB1, HB2, and Mirror IP addresses, and
compares the workgroup or domain information on both nodes to
ensure the information is the same.
• If there are any errors, a message box is displayed with details of
the error. Correct the problem on the server that has the error
and then click the Step 2: Validate Node Information button
again.
• If there are no errors, a message displays showing that Stage 1
is complete. You must exit the Configuration Wizard and continue
with the installation (or upgrade) process. The information you
entered is automatically saved.
Figure 34
Stage 1 Complete

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
86 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

6 Click the Exit button.

7 Click Yes to confirm the exit from the High Availability Wizard.

—End—

Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software

The High Availability feature uses the AutoStart software that must be
installed on both servers. The AutoStart software includes both Agent and
Console software.

There can also be AutoStart software patches that must be installed. SUs
and PEPs are found in the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library (ESPL), which
can be accessed at the following Web site: www.nortel.com/espl

Note: Within the AutoStart software, the two CallPilot servers are
included in an AutoStart domain. The name of the domain must be
unique within the network. For the purposes of this document, the
domain name [AutoStart_Domain] is used. This value must be
replaced with the AutoStart domain name to be used by the customer.
The AutoStart Domain has no association with the customer’s network
domain and is used only by the AutoStart software.

Install the AutoStart software on CP1

The following procedure installs AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Agent and Console
software on the CP1 server. This procedure takes approximately 10 minutes.

Installing the AutoStart Agent and Console software on CP1

Step Action

ATTENTION
The computer name must be set before you install the AutoStart software. The
software requires the computer name. The computer name must contain only
alphanumeric characters. Nonalphanumeric characters (such as a hyphen [-])
are not supported.
If you want to change the computer name after installing the server you must
uninstall and then reinstall the AutoStart software.

1 Insert the CallPilot Application CD.

2 Navigate to the Z:\EMC folder on the CallPilot Application CD.

3 Double-click EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.exe to unpack the
archive to D:\temp folder..

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 87

Result: Three files are unpacked into the D:\temp\EMC_Au-

toStart_5.3_SP3_Update folder: EAS53_WIN_x86.exe,
EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe, EMC AutoStart Update Process.pdf

4 Double-click EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe file to start the installation.

Result: The InstallShield Wizard informs you that the AutoStart 5.3
SP3 software is preparing to install (install preparation can take a few
minutes). After preparation is complete, Welcome window appears.
Figure 35
InstallShield Wizard - Preparing to install AutoStart 5.3 SP3 software

Figure 36
Welcome window

5 Click Next .
Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder to read the documents appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
88 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 37
Reminder to read the documents

6 Click Yes, I have read the documents.

Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder is closed.
7 Click Next on Welcome window.
Result: License Agreement window appears.
Figure 38
License Agreement window

8 Select the option I accept the terms in the license agreement.

9 Click Next.
Result:The Custom Setup window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 89

Figure 39
Custom Setup window

10 Click Change to change the installation path.

Result:The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box appears.
Figure 40
Change Current Destination Folder dialog box

11 In Folder name field, change the drive letter from C to D, change

the path to:
D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart\

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
90 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

ATTENTION
You must install the software in the D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart\
directory or the software does not work correctly.

12 Click OK.
Result:The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box closes
and you are returned to the Custom Setup window, which shows the
correct installation path.

13 Click Next.
Result:The Agent Connection Information window appears.
Figure 41
Agent Connection Information window

14 Leave the option Yes, this is the first node in the domain selected.
15 Enter the EMC AutoStartDomain Name. The AutoStart Domain
Name must be the same name that you entered in the High
Availability Configuration Wizard.
Note: This document uses [AutoStart_Domain]. This value must
be replaced with your AutoStart domain name.

16 Leave Initial Port Number unchanged.

17 Click Next
Result:The Mirroring Network Configuration & Product Licensing
window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 91

Figure 42
Mirroring Network Configuration and Product Licensing window

18 In the field Mirroring IP Address: select the IP address that was

assigned to the Mirror NIC on CP1 server. The default value is
Configure Later.
19 By default the AutoStart 5.3 SP3 module is selected from the
drop-down list. Enter AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Product license key
(provided with your CallPilot server) in the field on the right. Click
Add to add the license in the list.
Result: The AutoStart 5.3 SP3 module is added in the list at the
bottom with appropriate license key.
Note 1: The AutoStart license key is a string of 24 characters
plus a dash. There are 8 characters before the dash and 16
characters after the dash (XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX).
When entering the AutoStart license key, you must enter the
whole string including the dash.
Note 2: When you order the High Availability feature, AutoStart
5.3 SP3 license key comes in the form of EMC License
Registration Card.

20 For all other five modules in the drop-down list (Exchange 2003,
Oracle 3.1, Sql Server, MirrorView, SRDF) do the following:
a. Select the module from the drop-down list.
Result: Appropriate evaluation license is displayed in the field
on the right.
b. Click Add

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
92 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Result: Evaluation licenses for the five modules are added in the
list at the bottom.
Figure 43
Mirroring Network Configuration and Product Licensing window

21 Click Next to continue.

Result: The Confirm Settings window appears.
Figure 44
Confirm Settings window

22 Verify that the settings are correct.

23 Click Install to start the installation of the AutoStart Agent and

Console software.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 93

Result:The Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window appears and shows

the status of the installation.
Figure 45
Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window

24 Wait until the installation is complete and the InstallShield Wizard

Completed window appears.
Figure 46
InstallShield Wizard Completed window

25 Click Finish
Result: The AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer Information dialog box
appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
94 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 47
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 dialog box

26 Click No if there are patches to install or click Yes to restart the CP1
server.
Note: If there are patches available for AutoStart 5.3 SP3, install
the patches and then restart the CP1 server.

27 Delete the folder D:\temp\EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.

—End—

Add the node 2 administrator account to the AutoStart Console on

node 1

Add the node 2 administrator account to the AutoStart Console

on node 1
Step Action
This procedure adds the CP2 Administrator Account to the AutoStart
Console on CP1.

ATTENTION
The CP2 Administrator Account must be added to the AutoStart Console on
CP1 before you install the AutoStart software on CP2. If you try to install the
AutoStart software on CP2 before you add the administrator account of CP2
into the AutoStart console on CP1, the AutoStart Agent installed on CP2 cannot
communicate with the Agent installed on CP1. You must uninstall the Agent and
Console software and then reinstall the software.

1 Log on to CP1.
Note: An error can appear, indicating that “At least one service
or driver failed to start.” This is normal, as the AutoStart mirroring
service is installed on node 1; however, the service is not yet
fully configured so the server cannot start.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 95

2 Launch the AutoStart Console on CP1 by selecting Start >

Programs > EMC AutoStart > EMC AutoStart Console 5.3 SP3.
Result: The AutoStart Console appears.

3 In the Domain pane (left side of the window), click

[AutoStart_Domain] where [AutoStart_Domain] is the domain
name created when you installed the AutoStart Agent.
Note: If the domain is not visible and an error is reported, close
and reopen the AutoStart Console.

4 Select the Licensing/Security tab.

Figure 48
AutoStart Console - Licensing/Security tab - Add Admin User

5 In the Valid User List area, enter the following information:

a. In the User Name field, enter administrator.
b. In the Domain/Node field, enter the host name of CP2.
c. For the Access Rights option, select the Administrator option
button.
d. In the Description field, enter CallPilot Node 2.
6 Click Add.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
96 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Result: A row is added to the Valid User List.

Figure 49
AutoStart Console - Licensing/Security tab - Node 2 Administrator
user is added

7 Exit the AutoStart Console on CP1.

—End—

Install the AutoStart software on CP2

The following procedure installs AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Agent and Console
software on the CP2 server. This procedure takes approximately 10 minutes.

Installing the AutoStart Agent and Console software on CP2

Step Action

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 97

ATTENTION
The computer name must be set before you install the AutoStart software. The
software requires the computer name. The computer name must contain only
alphanumeric characters. Nonalphanumeric characters (such as a hyphen [-])
are not supported.
If you want to change the computer name after installing the server you must
uninstall and then reinstall the AutoStart software.

1 Insert the CallPilot Application CD.

2 Navigate to the Z:\EMC folder on the CallPilot Application CD.

3 Double-click EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.exe to unpack the

archive to the D:\temp folder.
Result: Three files are unpacked into the D:\temp\EMC_Au-
toStart_5.3_SP3_Update folder: EAS53_WIN_x86.exe,
EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe, EMC AutoStart Update Process.pdf

4 Double-click EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe to start the installation.

Result: The InstallShield Wizard informs you that AutoStart 5.3 SP3
software is preparing to install (this can take a few minutes). After
preparation is complete, the Welcome window appears.
Figure 50
InstallShield Wizard - Preparing to install AutoStart 5.3 SP3 software

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
98 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 51
Welcome window

5 Click Next.
Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder to read the documents appears.
Figure 52
Reminder to read the documents

6 Click Yes, I have read the documents.

Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder is closed.

7 Click Next on the Welcome window.

Result: The License Agreement window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 99

Figure 53
License Agreement window

8 Select the I accept the terms in the license agreement option.

9 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Setup window appears.
Figure 54
Custom Setup window

10 Click Change to change the installation path.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
100 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Result: The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box appears

Figure 55
Change Current Destination Folder dialog box

11 In the Folder name field, change the drive letter from C to D, change
the path to: D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart\

ATTENTION
You must install the software in the D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart\
directory or the software does not work correctly.

12 Click OK.
Result: The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box closes
and you are returned to the Custom Setup window, which shows the
correct installation path.

13 Click Next.
Result: The Agent Connection Information window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 101

Figure 56
Agent Connection Information window

14 Select the No, there is an existing node in the domain option

button.
Result:The field Primary Node Name is highlighted.
Figure 57
Agent Connection Information window – there is an existing node
in the domain

15 Enter the host name of CP1 server in the Primary Node Name field.

16 Enter the EMC AutoStart Domain Name. The AutoStart Domain

Name must be the same name that you entered in the High
Availability Configuration Wizard.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
102 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Note: This document uses [AutoStart_Domain]. This value must

be replaced with your AutoStart domain name.

17 Leave the Initial Port Number unchanged.

18 Click Next.
Result:The Mirroring Network Configuration & Product Licensing
window appears. The list of licenses is disabled.
Figure 58
Mirroring Network Configuration and Product Licensing window

Note: If you enter an invalid Primary Node Name, or the

AutoStart Agent is not running on the specified node, an error
message is displayed (similar to the following). Check that
the Primary Node Name is correct and that the networking is
configured so that the name can be resolved on another node.
Click OK to return to the Agent Connection Information window.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 103

Figure 59
Error: Invalid name or agent not running on Primary node

Note: : If you forgot to add the administrator account of CP2

server into the AutoStart domain, the following error is displayed.
Click OK to return to the Agent Connection Information window.
Configure licensing and security on the CP1 server according
to the chapter "Add the node 2 administrator account to the
AutoStart Console on node 1 " (page 94).

Figure 60
Primary Agent error

19 In the field Mirroring IP Address: select the IP address that was

assigned to the Mirror NIC on CP2 server. The default value is
Configure Later.

20 Click Next.
Result: The Confirm Settings window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
104 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 61
Confirm Settings window

21 Verify that the settings are correct.

22 Click Install to start the installation of the AutoStart Agent and

Console software.
Result:The Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window appears and shows
the status of the installation.
Figure 62
Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Install the AutoStart Agent and Console software 105

23 Wait until the installation is complete and the InstallShield Wizard

Completed window appears.
Figure 63
InstallShield Wizard Completed window

24 Click Finish.
Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer Information dialog box appears.
Figure 64
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 dialog box

25 Click No if there are patches to install or click Yes to restart the CP2
server.
Note: If there are patches available for AutoStart 5.3 SP3
software, install the patches and then restart the CP2 server.

26 Delete the folder D:\temp\EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
106 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Configure the AutoStart software

To configure the AutoStart software, both servers (CP1 and CP2) must be
running and have the HB1, HB2, and MIRROR LANs connected so that the
two servers can communicate using the LAN connections.

Configure the AutoStart software on CP1

Use the procedures in the following section to configure the AutoStart
software on CP1.

Modifying the AutoStart Domain and Verification links

Step Action

1 Launch the AutoStart Console by selecting Start > Programs >

EMC AutoStart > EMC AutoStart Console 5.3 SP3.

WARNING
Do not continue the configuration process until CP2 is
finished rebooting.

WARNING
Wait for both servers under Domains > [AutoStart_Domain]
> Nodes to appear green before making any changes
in the AutoStart Console. Failure to do so can result in
losing configured information for verification links upon
the next reboot.

2 In the Domains pane, select the CP1 node (Domains >

[AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > <CP1 Node Name>).
a. Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure the AutoStart software 107

Figure 65
AutoStart Console - Failure Detection and Mirroring tab

b. In the Paths Defined for Node list, select the entry that has
the ELAN IP address for CP1.
c. Click Delete Path.
d. In the Usage drop-down list, select Verification.
e. In the Local IP Address drop-down list, select the ELAN IP
address for CP1.
f. Click Add Path.
g. In the Paths Defined for Node list, select the entry that has
the CLAN IP address for CP1.
h. Click Delete Path.
i. In the Usage drop-down list, select Verification.
j. In the Local IP Address drop-down list, select the CLAN IP
address for CP1.
k. Click Add Path.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
108 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 66
AutoStart Console - Failure Detection and Mirroring tab - Adding
path

l. Click Apply.
m. Click Yes, if you are prompted to restart the agent to apply the
changes.
Note: It takes a few minutes for the agent to restart.

3 In the Domains pane, select the CP2 node (Domains >

[AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > <CP2 Node Name>).
a. Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.
b. In the Paths Defined for Node list, select the entry that has
the ELAN IP address for CP2.
c. Click Delete Path.
d. In the Usage drop-down list, select Verification.
e. In the Local IP Address drop-down list, select the ELAN IP
address for CP2.
f. Click Add Path.
g. In the Paths Defined for Node list, select the entry that has
the CLAN IP address for CP2.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure the AutoStart software 109

h. Click Delete Path.

i. In the Usage drop-down list, select Verification.
j. In the Local IP Address drop-down list, select the CLAN IP
address for CP2.
k. Click Add Path.
l. Click Apply.
m. Click Yes, if you are prompted to restart the agent to apply the
changes.
Note: It takes a few minutes for the agent to restart.

4 Wait for the CP1 node and the CP2 node to start.
The icon for the nodes (in the left-hand pane of the AutoStart
console) turn green after the AutoStart Agent starts.

—End—

Adding the Remote Mirroring Host for CP2

Step Action

1 On CP1, and in the Domains pane, select the CP2 node (Domains
> [AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > <CP2 Node Name>).

2 Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.

3 Ensure that the value in the Local Mirror Address field is set to
the IP address assigned to the MIRROR NIC on CP2. (The default
value is 193.0.0.11.)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
110 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 67
AutoStart Console - Failure Detection and Mirroring tab - Local Mirror
Address

4 Change the value in the Remote Mirror Host field to the host name
of node CP1.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure the AutoStart software 111

Figure 68
AutoStart Console - Failure Detection and Mirroring tab - Remote
Mirror Host

5 Click Apply.

6 Click Yes, if you are prompted to restart the agent to apply the
changes.
7 In the Domains pane, select the CP1 node (Domains >
[AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > <CP1 Node Name>).

8 Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
112 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 69
AutoStart Console - Failure Detection and Mirroring tab - Verify Local
and Remote Mirrors

9 Verify that the value in the Local Mirror Address field is set to the
IP address assigned to the MIRROR NIC on CP1. (The default value
is 193.0.0.10.)

10 Verify that the value in the Remote Mirror Host field is set to the
host name of node CP2.

—End—

Generating the AutoStart Definition File

Step Action
Generating the AutoStart Definition File is required to set the node-specific
settings in the AutoStart Definition Template file.

1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the D:\Nortel\HA folder.

2 Double-click the HighAvailabilityConfigurationWizard.exe file.

Result: The High Availability Configuration Wizard appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure the AutoStart software 113

The information that was previously entered is automatically loaded

and the node information validation is automatically rerun.
Figure 70
High Availability Configuration Wizard

3 Click the Step 3: Generate Definition File button to validate the

AutoStart software configuration and generate the Definition File.
• If there are any errors, a message box is displayed with the
error. Correct the problem and then click the Step 3: Generate
Definition File button again.
• If there are no errors, a message is displayed that the Definition
File is successfully generated and that you can exit the High
Availability Configuration Wizard.
Figure 71
Phase 2 Complete

4 Click OK to return to the High Availability Configuration Wizard.

5 Click Exit and then confirm that you want to exit from the High
Availability Configuration Wizard.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
114 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

—End—

Import the AutoStart definition file on CP1

Import the AutoStart definition file (CallPilot-Mirroring.def or
CallPilot-Mirroring-Single.def) in the AutoStart Console on CP1 by using
the following the procedure. Two AutoStart definition files are available, as
follows:
• CallPilot-Mirroring-Single.def (For systems with one MPB96 board.)
• CallPilot-Mirroring.def (For systems with three MPB96 boards.)

Importing the AutoStart definition file

Step Action

1 Open the AutoStart Console window.

2 Expand Domains.

3 Right-click [AutoStart_Domain]. (This is the domain name created

when the AutoStart agent is installed.)
4 Select the Import Domain Information option.
Result: The Import dialog box appears.

5 In the Import window, select CallPilot-Mirroring.def or CallPilot-

Mirroring-Single.def from the D:\Nortel\HA\ToolkitInstaller2.0
folder.
The AutoStart definition file is named either CallPilot-
Mirroring-Single.def (for systems with one MPB96 board) or
CallPilot-Mirroring.def (for systems with three MPB96 boards).

6 Click Import.
The import process takes approximately one minute to complete.

WARNING
During the Import process the AutoStart Console does
not respond.

7 Verify that the AutoStart definition file was successfully imported by

doing the following:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure the AutoStart software 115

a. Check the information bar at the bottom of the AutoStart Console

window for any error or warning messages.
b. In the AutoStart Console, expand Data Sources and check that
the drvE and drvF data sources were created.
c. In the AutoStart Console, expand Resource Groups and check
that the CallPilot resource group was created.

—End—

Add the Windows administrator password for the AutoStart Utility

Processes

ATTENTION
If the Windows administrator account names or passwords are different on
servers CP1 and CP2, the AutoStart software does not work correctly after it is
installed and configured.
You must ensure that the Windows administrator account is the same on both
High Availability servers for the AutoStart software to work properly.

The AutoStart software requires that the Windows administrator account be

updated for each Utility Process in the AutoStart software.
Use the following procedure to enter the Windows administrator account
information for each AutoStart Utility Process on CP1.

Adding the Windows administrator account password for the

AutoStart Utility Processes
Step Action

1 Open the AutoStart Console window.

2 Expand Domains.
3 Expand [AutoStart_Domain]. (This is the domain name created
when the AutoStart agent is installed.)

4 Expand Utility Processes.

Result: The Utility Processes are displayed:
• DisableAOS
• KillServices
• LoadDN
• LoadTSP

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
116 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

• UnloadTSP
• UnloadTSPOnStandbyServer

5 Select the DisableAOS Utility Process.

6 Select the Settings tab and do the following:
a. In the Login Info section, enter the password for the Windows
administrator account in the Password and Confirm fields.
Figure 72
AutoStart Console - Utility Processes

b. Check the Domain, User Name, and Directory fields to ensure

they are right.
• Domain must be the Windows domain that the CallPilot
servers are on (if applicable) or the Windows workgroup in
which the servers are located.
• User name must be the administrator account for selected
domain.
• The default directory is D:\Nortel\Data\HA\HA_DB_Scripts.

c. Click Apply.

7 Repeat Step 6 for each of the remaining Utility Processes.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Configure the AutoStart software 117

—End—

Add e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule

Use the following procedure to add e-mail addresses into the script of the
Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule so that the AutoStart software can
send out notification e-mail to the administrators when the Path Test failure
of the Managed ELAN IP occurs.

Adding e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif

rule
Step Action

1 Open the AutoStart Console.

2 On the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Rules.

3 Select Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif.
Result: The Settings tab for the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif
rule appears.
Figure 73
Rules - Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
118 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

4 Select the Rule Script tab.

Result: The rule script appears in the right pane of the AutoStart
Console.
Figure 74
Rule Script tab for Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule

5 Look for the @recipientList = () line in the rule script.

6 Add the recipient’s e-mail address in the parenthesis () of the

@recipientList line. You must add the backslash symbol (\) before
the at symbol (@) in the e-mail address.
If multiple e-mail addresses are added, separate each e-mail
address by a comma (,).

7 Click Apply.
8 Configure the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server so that
the AutoStart software can provide e-mail notification for failovers
and resource group state changes. The SMTP server domain must
first be configured for recipients to receive notification that a failover
or state change has occurred. See "Configuring the SMTP Server
for a domain" (page 188).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Bring the Resource Groups online 119

—End—

Bring the Resource Groups online

This section provides the procedures for bringing the following resource
groups online:
• CallPilot Resource Group
• CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] Resource Groups

Bring the CallPilot Resource Group online on CP1

Using the AutoStart Console, bring the CallPilot Resource Group online on
CP1 to activate the High Availability feature. Bringing the CallPilot Resource
Group online does the following:
• Assigns the shared drives to server CP1.
• Assigns the Managed ELAN/CLAN (virtual) IP addresses so that they
point to CP1.
• Loads the CallPilot database tables back to the CallPilot database.
• Starts all CallPilot services.

Bringing the CallPilot Resource Group online on CP1

Step Action

1 In the AutoStart Console window, expand Resource Groups

(Domains > [AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups).

2 Right-click CallPilot.
3 Select the Bring Online option, and then select <CP1 node name>.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
120 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 75
AutoStart Console - Bring Online - CallPilot Resource Group

Result: The following occurs:

• The Group State changes to Online Pending.
• The data sources (drive E and drive F) are automatically
attached and initialized. While the data sources are initialized,
they are in the warning state and their icons are yellow.
• The CallPilot services start on CP1.

Note: A message is displayed informing you that a data source

is being mirrored and the status of the data source is updated to
show the progress of the synchronization. It can take between 30
minutes to 2 hours for the data sources to be mirrored between
the two servers.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Bring the Resource Groups online 121

Figure 76
AutoStart Console - Initializing Volume Mirror message

4 Wait while the data sources are mirrored.

5 Verify that the Group State field turns green and shows as Online.
Result: When the Group State appears green and online, CallPilot
is started.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
122 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 77
AutoStart Console - Monitoring and Group States

—End—

Bring the Resource Groups CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] online

Use the following procedure to bring the CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2]
resource groups online.

Bringing the Resource Groups CallPilot_[CP1] and

CallPilot_[CP2] online
Step Action

1 In the AutoStart Console window, expand Resource Groups

(Domains > [AutoStart_Domain] > Modules > Resource Groups).

2 Bring CallPilot_[CP1] online (where [CP1] is the name of the CP1

server).
a. Right-click CallPilot_[CP1].
b. Select the Bring Online option, and then select <CP1 node
name>.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Bring the Resource Groups online 123

Figure 78
AutoStart Console - Bring Online - CallPilot_[CP1] Resource Group

3 Bring CallPilot_[CP2] online (where [CP2] is the name of the CP2

server).
a. Right-click CallPilot_[CP2].
b. Select the Bring Online option, and then select <CP2 node
name>.

4 Verify that both Resource Groups are green and show a Group
State of Online.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
124 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Figure 79
AutoStart Console - Verify status of both CallPilot_[CP1] and
CallPilot_[CP2] Resource Groups

—End—

Test your configuration

Use the following procedure to test the configuration of CP1 and CP2.

Testing the configuration of CP1 and CP2

Step Action

1 Verify that server CP1 is running and accepting calls. Test the server
CP1 to make sure that all channels and DSP resources are working
correctly.

2 Using the AutoStart console, manually cause a failover by relocating

the Resource Group CallPilot to server CP2.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Create the CallPilot Reporter connections 125

WARNING
Do not attempt to failover from CP1 to CP2 until the
mirroring started in "Bringing the CallPilot Resource
Group online on CP1" (page 119) is complete.

For more information, see "Initiating a manual failover" (page 220).

3 Ensure that server CP2 takes over and can accept calls.

4 Move the dongle from server CP1 to server CP2.

5 Test the server CP2 to make sure that all channels and DSP
resources are working correctly.
Note: At this point server CP2 is running as the active server
and CP1 is the standby server.

—End—

Create the CallPilot Reporter connections

CallPilot Reporter connects to the pair of High Availability servers using the
Managed (virtual) host name. After CallPilot Reporter first connects to the
pair of servers, the active server returns the Managed host name, rather
than the actual host name of the active server. Because the Managed
host name is returned (and not the actual host name of the active server),
CallPilot Reporter is unaware that it is connected to a pair of High Availability
servers.
Any reports generated are based on the Managed host name, independent
of which server is currently the active server. Both High Availability servers
must first register with the CallPilot Reporter to make the CallPilot Reporter
work with the High Availability system.
Note: If you are not performing a new installation of CallPilot 5.0 High
Availability system, a backup of CallPilot Reporter must be performed
prior this procedure and the backup must be restored on the Reporter
stand-alone PC right after this registration. This note applies only to
the following:
• upgrading to CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system
• changing the computer name of the Reporter stand-alone PC
• using a new Reporter stand-alone PC

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
126 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

ATTENTION
To make both High Availability servers register with CallPilot Reporter, perform the
following manual procedure the very first time you connect the CallPilot Reporter
to a CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system.

For CallPilot Reporter, the failover process is the same as if a server goes
down and then comes back into service (even though the active server
goes down and the standby server comes into service as the new active
server). The CallPilot Reporter recovery mechanism pings the Managed
host name and automatically reconnects when the server comes back into
service. Because the database is mirrored from the active High Availability
to the standby High Availability server, CallPilot Reporter can download
any additional Operational Measurements (OM) that are buffered during
the failover process.
Use the following the following procedure the first time you bring up the High
Availability system and register it to the CallPilot Reporter Server.

Creating the CallPilot Reporter connection

Step Action

1 Ensure that CallPilot Reporter is online.

2 Connect CallPilot Reporter to the High Availability system using the

Managed host name (where CP1 is the active server and CP2 is
the standby server).
3 Perform a manual failover. See "Initiating a manual failover" (page
220).
Result: The active server (CP1) goes down and the standby server
(CP2) comes into service as the new active server.

4 Wait for CP2 to become the active server and ensure that the server
is ready to accept calls.

5 In CallPilot Reporter, click Log out and Erase.

6 Log back on to CallPilot Reporter.

7 Ensure that CallPilot Reporter is online.
Result: CallPilot Reporter creates a record using the Managed host
name and places all incoming data from the active High Availability
server (it does not matter which High Availability server in the pair)
under that record.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Add the servers to a Windows domain 127

—End—

Add the servers to a Windows domain

This following procedure is optional. It is only required if the CallPilot servers
will be members of a Windows domain. Nortel recommends using the
Windows default workgroup to first configure the High Availability system,
and then join the customer domain after the High Availability system is
working (if the system has to join the domain). If the CallPilot 5.0 High
Availability system is installed and configured under a workgroup, use the
following procedure to join a domain.
Note: Adding the CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system into a domain
makes the system dependent on the domain controller, the DNS server,
and the CLAN connection. If the system lost the connection to the
domain controller after joining a domain (which can be caused by losing
the CLAN connection), then the CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system
cannot properly perform failovers because of domain user validation
failure. (The domain user information is needed for the AutoStart
Utilities to run after joining a domain.) However, for a CallPilot 5.0 High
Availability system in a workgroup, the loss of the CLAN connection
has no impact to the failover performance. Nortel does not recommend
that you add your CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system into a domain
unless it must be part of the domain.

Joining a Windows domain

Step Action
This procedure assumes that CP1 is the active server and CP2 is the
standby server.

1 Log on to CP1.
2 Launch the AutoStart Console on CP1 by selecting Start >
Programs > EMC AutoStart > EMC AutoStart Console 5.3 SP3.
Result: The AutoStart Console appears.

3 Select the [AutoStart_Domain].

4 Select the Licensing/Security tab.

5 In the Valid User List area, enter the following information:

a. In the User Name field, enter administrator.
b. In the Domain/Node field, enter the Windows domain name that
the CallPilot system will be joining.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
128 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

c. For the Access Rights option, select the Administrator option

button.
d. In the Description field, enter Windows domain.

6 Click Add.
Result: A row is added to the Valid User List.

7 On CP1, stop monitoring. See "Disabling automatic failovers (stop

monitoring)" (page 218).

8 Take the CallPilot resource group offline on CP1. See "Taking the
CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).

9 On CP1, do the following:

a. Right-click My Computer.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
b. Select the Computer Name tab and click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
Figure 80
Computer Name Changes

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Add the servers to a Windows domain 129

c. In the Member of section, select the Domain option.

d. Enter the name of the domain and click OK.
Result: The Domain Administrator Privileges window appears.
e. Enter the domain administrator and password.
Contact your network administrator for this information.
Result: The Welcome to Domain window appears.
f. Click OK.
Result: A warning window appears prompting you to restart the
computer in order for changes to take effect.
g. Click OK.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
h. Click OK.
Result: The System Settings Changes window appears
prompting you to restart the computer.
i. Click Yes to restart CP1.
j. Log on to CP1 using the domain user account which is a member
of the Domain Administrators group.
10 On CP2, do the following:
a. Right-click My Computer.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
b. Select the Computer Name tab and click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
c. In the Member of section, select the Domain option.
d. Enter the name of the domain and click OK.
Result: The Domain Administrator Privileges window appears.
e. Enter the domain administrator and password.
Contact your network administrator for this information.
Result: The Welcome to Domain window appears.
f. Click OK.
Result: A warning window appears prompting you to restart the
computer in order for changes to take effect.
g. Click OK.
Result: The System Properties window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
130 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

h. Click OK.
Result: The System Settings Changes window appears
prompting you to restart the computer.
i. Click Yes to restart CP2.
j. Log on to CP2 using the domain user account which is a member
of the Domain Administrators group.

11 On CP1, launch the AutoStart Console window.

12 Expand Domains.
13 Expand [AutoStart_Domain]. (This is the domain name created
when the AutoStart agent was installed.)

14 Expand Utility Processes.

Result: The Utility Processes are displayed:
• DisableAOS
• KillServices
• LoadDN
• LoadTSP
• UnloadTSP
• UnloadTSPOnStandbyServer

15 Select the DisableAOS Utility Process.

16 Select the Settings tab and to the following:

a. Update the Domain, User Name, and Directory fields.
• Domain must be the Windows domain that the CallPilot
servers are on (if applicable) or the Windows workgroup in
which the servers are located.
• User name must be the domain administrator account for
selected domain.
• The default directory is D:\Nortel\Data\HA\HA_DB_Scripts.

b. In the Login Info section, enter the password for the Windows
administrator account in the Password and Confirm fields.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Add the servers to a Windows domain 131

Figure 81
AutoStart Console - Utility Processes

c. Click Apply.

17 Repeat Step 16 for each of the remaining Utility Processes.

18 On CP1, enable monitoring. See "Enabling automatic failovers (start

monitoring)" (page 219).

19 Bring the CallPilot resource group online on CP1. See "Bringing the
CallPilot resource group online" (page 214).

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
132 Chapter 5 Install and configure the High Availability pair

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 133

Chapter 6
Maintaining a High Availability system
In this chapter
"CallPilot Configuration Wizard" (page 133)

"Working with domains and workgroups" (page 180)

"EMC AutoStart Agent and Console" (page 187)

"Support" (page 235)

"RAID splitting for HA systems" (page 268)

"CallPilot Manager, Channel Monitor" (page 272)

This chapter outlines the procedures used to maintain a High Availability

system.

Note: It is good practice and highly recommended to split RAID on

both nodes prior to performing any maintenance activities on a High
Availability system.

CallPilot Configuration Wizard

The EMC AutoStart software stores some information (including host names
and IP addresses) from both servers in a High Availability pair to provide the
data mirroring and failover mechanisms. As a result, when changing the
configuration of a server using the Configuration Wizard, additional steps
are required to ensure that the pair of servers continues to function correctly.
Use the following procedure for rerunning the Configuration Wizard after the
system is configured.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
134 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Change the Server Information

The Server Information page of the Configuration Wizard can be used to
change the computer name, time zone, dialing information, LDAP search
base and the administrator account password
• To change the time zone, dialing information, or LDAP search base, see
"Changing the Server Information" (page 134).
• To change a computer name, see Figure 80 "Computer Name Changes"
(page 128).
• To change the administrator account password, see "Administrator
account changes" (page 138).

Changing the Server Information

Step Action
Use this procedure to change the time zone, dialing information, and LDAP
search base.

1 On CP1 (the active High Availability server) do the following:

a. Ensure the dongle is plugged into CP1. If the dongle is not on
CP1, move it to CP1 and wait for three minutes.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-320).
b. Launch the AutoStart Console.
c. Stop monitoring on the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)"
(page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP1 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Server Information check box.
Result: The Server Information window appears.
g. If necessary, change the Time Zone, Dialing Information, or
LDAP Search Base.
Note: Do not change the computer name using this
procedure, see "Computer name changes" (page 136).

h. Click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 135

Result: The Password Information window appears.

i. Select the Leave password unchanged option.
Note: Do not the change the password using this procedure,
see "Administrator account changes" (page 138).

j. Click Next.
k. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
l. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP2).
m. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP2, restart CP1.

2 Move the dongle to CP2.

For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware Installation
(NN44200-320).

3 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drive E and drive F are online and
show green in the AutoStart Console.
c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP2 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Server Information check box.
Result: The Server Information window appears.
g. If necessary, change the Time Zone, Dialing Information, or
LDAP Search Base.
Note: Do not change the computer name using this
procedure, see "Computer name changes" (page 136).

h. Click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
136 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Result: The Password Information window appears.

i. Select the Leave password unchanged option.
Note: Do not change the password using this procedure,
see "Administrator account changes" (page 138).

j. Click Next.
k. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
l. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP1).
m. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.

4 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP2 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. Enable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

—End—

Computer name changes

After the AutoStart software is installed, it is possible to change the name
of either of the servers in a High Availability pair. However, to do so you
must uninstall and reinstall the AutoStart software after making the change.
Use the procedures in this section to change the computer name of the
following types of servers:
• Servers in a workgroup (For more information, see "Changing the name
of a server in a workgroup" (page 136).)
• Servers in a Windows domain (For more information, see "Changing the
name of a server in a Windows domain" (page 137).)

Changing the name of a server in a workgroup

Step Action
Use the following procedure to change the computer name of a High
Availability server that is in a workgroup.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 137

1 Disable the AutoStart Monitoring. For more information, see

"Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Take the CallPilot resource group offline. For more information, see
"Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).
3 Uninstall the AutoStart Agent and AutoStart Console, including their
patches on both nodes. For more information, see "Uninstall the
AutoStart software" (page 231).

4 Change the computer name. For more information, see "Manually

changing the server name" (page 46).

ATTENTION
The computer name must contain only alphanumeric characters.
Nonalphanumeric characters (such as a hyphen [-]) are not supported.

5 Restart both nodes.

6 Reinstall AutoStart Agent and Console and configure the High

Availability system by performing all the tasks and procedures:
• from "Running Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration
Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration" (page 83)
• to "Test your configuration" (page 124)
Note: You do not have to perform all the steps in the testing
procedure. Stop after you have performed the manual
failover.

—End—

Changing the name of a server in a Windows domain

Step Action
Use the following procedure to change the computer name of a High
Availability server that is in a Windows domain.

1 From the AutoStart Console, stop monitoring. For more information,

see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Take the AutoStart resource group offline. For more information, see
"Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).
Note: This takes the CallPilot Server out of service.

3 Remove the server from the Windows domain.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
138 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

4 Set the server back to WORKGROUP using a domain account that

has permissions to do so.

5 Restart the server.

6 After the server restarts, log on as an administrator.

7 Change the server name. For more information, see "Manually

changing the server name" (page 46).

8 Restart the server.

9 After the server restarts, log on as an administrator.

10 Rejoin the domain.

11 Restart the server.

12 After the server restarts, log on using the CallPilot High Availability
server domain account.
13 Uninstall, reinstall, and reconfigure the AutoStart software. For more
information, see the following:
• "Uninstall the AutoStart software" (page 231)
• "Reinstall the AutoStart software" (page 234)
• "Configure the AutoStart software" (page 106)

14 Bring the Resource group online. For more information, see

"Bringing the CallPilot resource group online" (page 214).
15 Reenable the AutoStart monitoring after all CallPilot services are
up. For more information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start
monitoring)" (page 219).

—End—

Administrator account changes

Use the following procedure to change the administrator password of a High
Availability system using the Configuration Wizard.

Changing the administrator password of High Availability system

using the Configuration Wizard
Step Action

1 If the High Availability system is currently on a workgroup, proceed

to the next step. Otherwise, move the CallPilot 5.0 High Availability

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 139

pair from the domain to a workgroup. For more information, see

"Joining a workgroup" (page 181).

2 On CP1 (the active High Availability server) do the following:

a. Ensure the dongle is plugged into CP1. If the dongle is not on
CP1, move it to CP1 and wait for 3 minutes.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-320).
b. Launch the AutoStart Console.
c. Stop monitoring on the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)"
(page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP1 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Server Information check box.
Result: The Server Information window appears.
g. Click Next.
Result: The Password Information window appears.
h. Select the Change the password option.
Result: When this option is selected, three additional password
options appear.
i. Enter the Current password.
j. Enter the New password.
k. Reenter the new password in the Confirm the password field.
l. Click Next.
Result: A warning message appears informing you to change
the password on the other High Availability server (CP2) and to
also change the administrator password for the AutoStart Utility
Processes.
m. Click OK to dismiss the warning message.
n. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
140 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

o. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating

a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP2).
p. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP2, restart CP1.
3 Move the dongle to CP2.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware Installation
(NN44200-320).

4 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drvE and drvF are green/online in
the AutoStart Console.
c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP2 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Server Information check box.
Result: The Server Information window appears.
g. Click Next.
Result: The Password Information window appears.
h. Select the Change the password option.
Result: When this option is selected, three additional password
options appear.
i. Enter the Current password.
j. Enter the New password.
k. Reenter the new password in the Confirm the password field.
l. Click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 141

Result: A warning message appears informing you to change

the password on the other High Availability server (CP1 -
which you have already completed) and to also change the
administrator password for the AutoStart Utility Processes.
m. Click OK to dismiss the warning message.
n. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
o. Change the administrator password for each of the Utility
Processes. For more information, see "Changing the Utility
Processes administrator password" (page 163).
p. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP1).
q. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.

5 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP2 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. Enable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

—End—

Change the Media Allocation

Use the following procedure to modify the MPB96 board or DSP resource
settings.

Changing the Media Allocation

Step Action

1 On CP1 (the active High Availability server) do the following:

a. Ensure the dongle is plugged into CP1. If the dongle is not on
CP1, move it to CP1 and wait for 3 minutes.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-320).
b. Launch the AutoStart Console.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
142 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

c. Stop monitoring on the CallPilot resource group. For more

information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)"
(page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP1 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Media Allocation check box.
Result: The Media Allocation window appears.
g. Select the MPB96 board to be modified.
h. Change the DSP resources as required.
i. Click Next.
j. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
k. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP2).
l. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP2, restart CP1.
2 Move the dongle to CP2.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware Installation
(NN44200-320).

3 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drvE and drvF are green/online in
the AutoStart Console.
c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP2 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 143

Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List

screen appears.
f. Select the Media Allocation check box.
Result: The Media Allocation window appears.
g. Select the MPB96 board to be modified.
h. Change the DSP resources as required.
i. Click Next.
j. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
k. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP1).
l. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.

4 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP2 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. Enable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

—End—

Change the Switch Configuration

Use the following procedure to change the switch configuration on a working
CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system. This procedure can be used to
change the following in the Switch Configuration:
• Changing the Switch Information (switch type, customer number, and
switch IP address)

ATTENTION
If you are changing the switch IP Address, you must first change the switch IP
address in the AutoStart Console. For more information, see "Change the
Switch IP address in AutoStart Console" (page 209). Then use the following
procedure to complete the change of the switch IP Address.

• Changing the TNs

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
144 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

• Changing the CDNs

Changing the Switch Configuration

Step Action
CP1 is the active High Availability server and CP2 is the standby High
Availability server.

1 On CP1 (the active High Availability server) do the following:

a. Ensure the dongle is plugged into CP1. If the dongle is not on
CP1, move it to CP1 and wait for 3 minutes.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-320).
b. Launch the AutoStart Console.
c. Stop monitoring on the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)"
(page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP1 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Switch Configuration check box.
Result: The Meridian 1 Switch Information window appears.
g. If required, change the Switch Type, Switch Customer Number,
or Switch IP Address.

ATTENTION
Before changing the Switch IP Address in the Configuration Wizard,
you must have changed the IP address in the AutoStart Console.

h. If required, change or add the TNs on CP1 and click Next.

i. If required, change or add the CDNs on CP1 and click Next.
j. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
k. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 145

Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought

online on the standby High Availability server (CP2).
l. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP2, restart CP1.

2 Move the dongle to CP2.

For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware Installation
(NN44200-320).

3 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drvE and drvF are green and show
as online in the AutoStart Console.
c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP2 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Switch Configuration check box.
Result: The Meridian 1 Switch Information window appears.
g. If required, change the Switch Type, Switch Customer Number,
or Switch IP Address.

ATTENTION
Before changing the Switch IP Address in the Configuration Wizard,
you must have changed the IP address in the AutoStart Console.

h. If required, change or add the TNs on CP2 and click Next.

i. If required, change or add the CDNs on CP2 and click Next.
j. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
k. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP1).
l. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
146 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

4 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP2 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. Enable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

5 Test new or changed TNs or CDNs to ensure system functionality.

—End—

Install a new language

Use the following procedure to install additional languages or speech
recognition on the High Availability system.

Installing a new language

Step Action

1 On CP1 (the active High Availability server) do the following:

a. Ensure the dongle is plugged into CP1. If the dongle is not on
CP1, move it to CP1 and wait for 3 minutes.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-320).
b. Launch the AutoStart Console.
c. Stop monitoring on the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)"
(page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP1 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
f. Select the Language Installation check box.
Result: The Language Source Directory window appears.
g. Insert the Language Source CD into the DVD drive.
h. Ensure the Install Language option is selected.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 147

i. Ensure that the Language CD Location is set to z:.

j. Click Next.
Result: The Language Installation window appears.
k. On the Language Installation page, do the following:
i. Select Languages and Automated Speech recognition to be
installed.
ii. If required, change the Primary Language or select
Secondary Languages.
Note: The Secondary Language is optional.

ATTENTION
The same languages must be installed on CP1 and CP2.

l. Click Next.
m. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
n. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP2).
o. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP2, restart CP1.

2 Move the dongle to CP2.

For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware Installation
(NN44200-320).

3 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
d. Log on to CallPilot Manager on CP2 and start the Configuration
Wizard.
e. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
148 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List

screen appears.
f. Select the Language Installation check box.
Result: The Language Source Directory window appears.
g. Insert the Language Source CD into the DVD drive.
h. Ensure the Install Language option is selected.
i. Ensure that the Language CD Location is set to z:.
j. Click Next.
Result: The Language Installation window appears.
k. On the Language Installation page, do the following:
i. Select Languages and Automated Speech recognition to be
installed.
ii. If required, change the Primary Language or select
Secondary Languages.
Note: The Secondary Language is optional.

ATTENTION
The same languages must be installed on CP1 and CP2.

l. Click Next.
m. Click Finish to complete the Configuration Wizard.
n. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP1).
o. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.
4 On CP1, do the following:
a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP2 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. Enable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 149

Change the Network Interface Card configuration and network settings

To provide the Managed IP service that is used to make the pair of High
Availability servers appear as one server to the external network, the
AutoStart software must know the local IP addresses of the ELAN Subnet
and Nortel Server Subnet (CLAN) of the pair of servers. If changes are
made to the ELAN Subnet IP address and Nortel Server Subnet IP address
on either server after the AutoStart software is installed, the AutoStart
software no longer works correctly. Depending on the state of the server
when the change is made, this can cause a failover to the standby server
or it can break the failover process.

ATTENTION
Before changing any IP address or host name, Nortel recommends that you
take note of the IP addresses and host name. It is good practice to save them
to a safe location just in case you need them again (for example, if you need
to recover the server).

The IP addresses and host names are in the following locations:

• ELAN or CLAN IP addresses—Run the command ipconfig /all
command to check the current IP addresses.
• Managed host name—Navigate to the E:\Nortel\HA folder and open the
AutoStart_Configuration.ini file to find the Managed host name. The
Managed host name is mapped to the Managed CLAN IP address.
• Managed ELAN IP address (Virtual ELAN IP address)—This IP address
is also saved in the E:\Nortel\HA\AutoStart_Configuration.ini file.

All of the configuration data (including Managed ELAN/CLAN IP addresses)

required by the AutoStart software is also saved in a customized AutoStart
definition file. This definition file is in the following folder: D:\Program Files\
[AutoStart_Domain]\Module\Tool Kit 2.0.
Depending on your system, the AutoStart definition file has a different
name, as follows:
• For systems with one MPB96 board, the definition file is called
CallPilot-Mirroring-Single.def.
• For systems with three MPB96 boards, the definition file is called
CallPilot-Mirroring.def.

Local networking settings

The following procedures are used to change the local IP settings on either
of the two servers that make up a CallPilot High Availability pair.
Note: These procedures do not apply to the Managed ELAN and CLAN
IP settings. For more information, see "Managed networking settings"
(page 156).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
150 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Use the procedures in this section to change the following:

• "ELAN or CLAN IP address changes" (page 150)
• "HB1, HB2, and Mirroring IP address changes" (page 152)

ELAN or CLAN IP address changes You can use this procedure to

change the local ELAN or CLAN IP address on either one of the servers in a
High Availability configuration after the AutoStart software is installed.

Changing the ELAN or CLAN IP address

Step Action

1 Disable the AutoStart Monitoring.

For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Take the resource group CallPilot offline.

For more information, see "Taking the CallPilot resource group
offline" (page 216).
3 Attach drive E and drive F to the node whose ELAN IP address or
CLAN IP address has to be changed. Perform the following for drive
E and drive F:
a. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >
Data Sources.
b. Right-click the drive you want to connect.
c. Select Attach Data Source.

4 Use the Windows Services utility to manually start the following

CallPilot services individually and in the following order:
• Adaptive Server Anywhere - DB_SQLANY
• CallPilot HAL Monitor
• CallPilot LDAP
• CallPilot AOS
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 1
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 102
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 103
• CallPilot Multimedia Cache

5 Log on to CallPilot Manager and run the Configuration Wizard as

follows:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 151

a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration

Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either
an Express or Standard setup.
b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen
appears.
c. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
d. Select the Network Interface Card Configuration (ELAN and
CLAN) check box.
e. Change the ELAN or CLAN network setting as required.
f. Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.
g. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
h. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information.
After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box
reminds you to restart the server for the configuration to take
effect.
i. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.
j. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.

6 If prompted, restart the server after the Configuration Wizard is

complete.

7 Update the name resolution mechanism. (Update the

DNS/WINS/hosts file information on both nodes if they are used,
especially for the CLAN IP address, which normally is mapped to the
node name on the DNS server.)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
152 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

8 Launch the AutoStart Console and do the following:

a. Expand the node list in the AutoStart Console.
b. From the Paths Defined for Node list, delete the Verification
links that use the previous ELAN or CLAN IP addresses.
c. Create new Verification links that will use the new ELAN or CLAN
IP addresses.

9 If the ELAN IP or CLAN IP addresses on another node also have to

be changed, repeat step 3 to step 8 on that node as well.

10 Bring the CallPilot resource group online (see "Bringing the CallPilot
resource group online" (page 214)) and then enable AutoStart
Monitoring (see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

—End—

HB1, HB2, and Mirroring IP address changes

WARNING
Nortel recommends that you do not change the IP address used
for the Heartbeat (HB1), Heartbeat backup (HB2), or Mirroring
links after the AutoStart software is installed.

If the Heartbeat (HB1), Heartbeat backup (HB2), or Mirroring link IP

addresses are changed, you must uninstall and reinstall the AutoStart
software on both servers as part of changing the IP addresses. For more
information, see the following:
• "Uninstall the AutoStart software" (page 231)
• "Reinstall the AutoStart software" (page 234).

Changing the HB1, HB2, and Mirroring IP addresses

Step Action

1 Uninstall the AutoStart on both High Availability servers. For more

information, see "Uninstall the AutoStart software" (page 231).

2 Move the dongle to the server where you will run Configuration
Wizard to perform the IP address change and wait 3 minutes.
3 Use the Windows Services utility to manually start the following
CallPilot services individually and in the following order:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 153

• Adaptive Server Anywhere - DB_SQLANY

• CallPilot HAL Monitor
• CallPilot LDAP
• CallPilot AOS
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 1
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 102
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 103
• CallPilot Multimedia Cache

4 Log on to CallPilot Manager and run the Configuration Wizard as

follows:
a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration
Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears prompting you to choose either an
Express or Standard setup.
b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen
appears.
c. Select the CallPilot Individual Feature Configuration
(Express Mode) option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Express Configuration List
screen appears.
d. Select the Network Interface Card Configuration (ELAN and
CLAN) check box.
e. Change the IP addresses as required.
f. Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.
g. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
h. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
154 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box

reminds you to restart the server for the configuration to take
effect.
i. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.
j. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.

5 Restart the server.

6 Repeat the previous steps if the same IP change is required on the

other High Availability server.

7 Connect the LAN.

For more information, see "Connect and verify LAN connections"
(page 75) and complete the following procedures:
• "Connecting and verifying LAN connections" (page 76)
• "Modifying the hosts file" (page 80) (optional)
• "Testing the host name resolution" (page 82)

8 Check the configuration of CP1 and CP2.

For more information, see "Running Stage 1 of the High Availability
Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration" (page
83).

9 Install the AutoStart Software on CP1.

For more information, see "Installing the AutoStart Agent and
Console software on CP1" (page 86).

10 Add the CP2 Administrator account to the AutoStart Console.

For more information, see "Add the node 2 administrator account to
the AutoStart Console on node 1" (page 94).
11 Install the AutoStart software on CP2.
For more information, see "Installing the AutoStart Agent and
Console software on CP2" (page 96).
12 To configure the AutoStart software, do the following:
a. Configure the AutoStart software.
For more information, see "Configure the AutoStart software"
(page 106).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 155

WARNING
You must wait for both servers under Domains >
[AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes to appear green before
making any changes in the AutoStart Console. Failure
to do so can result in the loss configured information
for verification links upon the next restart.

i. Modify the AutoStart Domain and Verification links.

For more information, see "Modifying the AutoStart Domain
and Verification links" (page 106).
ii. Add the Remote Mirroring Host for the new 1005r or 1006r
server (CP2).
For more information, see "Adding the Remote Mirroring
Host for CP2" (page 109).
b. Generate the AutoStart Definition File.
For more information, see "Generating the AutoStart Definition
File" (page 112).
c. Import the AutoStart Definition File.
For more information, see "Importing the AutoStart definition
file" (page 114).
d. Add the Windows administrator account password for the
AutoStart Utility Processes.
For more information, see "Adding the Windows administrator
account password for the AutoStart Utility Processes" (page
115).

13 Bring the Resource Groups online.

For more information, see "Bring the Resource Groups online" (page
119).
a. Bring the CallPilot Resource Group online on CP1.
For more information, see "Bringing the CallPilot Resource
Group online on CP1" (page 119).
b. Bring the CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] Resources Groups
online.
For more information, see "Bringing the Resource Groups
CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] online" (page 122).

14 Create the CallPilot Reporter connections. For more information,

see "Creating the CallPilot Reporter connection" (page 126).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
156 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

—End—

Managed networking settings

After the AutoStart software is installed, it is possible to change the
Managed networking settings, which include the following settings:
• Managed CLAN host name (See "Changing the Managed CLAN host
name" (page 156).)
• Managed CLAN IP address (See "Changing the Managed CLAN IP
address" (page 156).)
• Managed ELAN IP address (See "Changing the Managed ELAN IP
address" (page 159).)

Changing the Managed CLAN host name

Step Action

1 Ensure DNS or host files are updated with new Managed CLAN
host name.

2 Replace the old Managed host name with the new Managed host
name in the AutoStart_Configuration.ini file by doing the following:
a. Navigate to the E:\Nortel\HA folder.
b. Double-click the AutoStart_Configuration.ini file to open the
file.
c. Edit the VirtualHostname with the new Managed CLAN host
name.
d. Save the file.

—End—

Changing the Managed CLAN IP address

Step Action
This procedure changes only the Managed CLAN IP address. (It does not
change the physical CLAN IP settings.)

1 Change the Managed host name mapping to the new Managed

CLAN IP address on your DNS server or in the appropriate hosts file.

2 Disable the AutoStart Monitoring. For more information, see

"Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 157

3 Take the CallPilot resource group offline. For more information, see
"Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).

4 Open the AutoStart Console and delete the Managed CLAN IP

resources in the Startup and Shutdown sequences by doing the
following:
a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups.
b. Select the CallPilot resource group.
c. Select the Settings tab.
d. Under Startup Sequence, select the Managed CLAN IP address
and click Delete. Verify the adapter from the shutdown sequence
is also deleted.

5 On the AutoStart Console, delete the Managed CLAN IP resource in

the IP resource list by doing the following:
a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > IP Addresses.
b. Select the Managed CLAN IP address.
c. Click Delete the current IP address .

6 Create the new Managed CLAN IP resource by doing the following:

a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > IP Addresses.
b. Right-click IP Addresses and select Create New IP Address.
Result: The New Manage IP Address window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
158 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 82
New Managed IP Address

c. Under IP Information, clear the Get IP from Name Service

check box.
Result: The IP address field appears.
d. Enter the new Managed CLAN IP address and subnet mask.
e. Select the Network Path Testing tab.
f. Enter the test IP address of the new Managed CLAN IP address.
g. Click Add IP Address.
h. Click Apply.

7 On the AutoStart Console, add the new Managed CLAN IP resource

into the Startup and Shutdown sequences of the CallPilot resource

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 159

group. Using the arrows, move the Managed CLAN IP back to its
original location, which is:
• directly after the Managed ELAN IP in the Startup Sequence list
• directly before the Managed ELAN IP in the Shutdown Sequence
list

a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups > CallPilot.

b. Select the Settings tab.
c. Under Startup Sequence select new CLAN address, selectIP
from the drop down list and click Add.
d. Clear the Failure Response Settings check boxes.
e. Click Apply.
f. Under the Startup Sequence, select the new Managed CLAN
IP address and move it directly below the Managed ELAN IP
address.
g. Under the Shutdown Sequence, select the new Managed CLAN
IP address and move it directly above the Managed ELAN IP
address.
h. Click Apply.

8 Bring the CallPilot resource group online. For more information, see
"Bringing the CallPilot resource group online" (page 214).
9 Enable the AutoStart Monitoring. For more information, see
"Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)" (page 219).

—End—

Changing the Managed ELAN IP address

Step Action
This procedure changes only the Managed ELAN IP address. (It does not
change the physical ELAN IP settings.)

1 Disable the AutoStart Monitoring. For more information, see

"Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Take the CallPilot resource group offline. For more information, see
"Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).
3 Open the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure trigger and remove Managed
ELAN IP from the Selected Items.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
160 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

4 Click Apply.

5 Open the AutoStart Console and delete the Managed ELAN IP

resources in the Startup and Shutdown sequences by doing the
following:
a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups.
b. Select the CallPilot resource group.
c. Select the Settings tab.
d. Under Startup Sequence, select the Managed ELAN IP address
and click Delete. Verify the adapter from the shutdown sequence
is also deleted.
6 On the AutoStart Console, delete the Managed ELAN IP resource in
the IP resource list by doing the following:
a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > IP Addresses.
b. Select the Managed ELAN IP address.
c. Click Delete the current IP address.

7 Create the new Managed ELAN IP resource by doing the following:

a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > IP Addresses.
b. Right-click IP Addresses and select Create New IP Address.
Result: The New Manage IP Address window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 161

Figure 83
New Managed IP Address

c. Under IP Information, clear the Get IP from Name Service

check box.
d. Enter the new Managed ELAN IP address and subnet mask.
e. Enter the switch IP address as the Test Path of the new Managed
ELAN IP address.
f. Click Apply.

8 On the AutoStart Console, add the new Managed ELAN IP resource

into the Startup and Shutdown sequences of the CallPilot resource
group. Ensure that the Managed ELAN IP address resource is in its
original location, which is:
• directly before the Managed CLAN IP address on the Startup
sequence

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
162 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

• directly after the Managed CLAN IP address on the Shutdown

sequence

a. Expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups > CallPilot.

b. Select the Settings tab.
c. Under Startup Sequence select new ELAN address, select IP
from the drop down list and click Add.
d. Clear the Failure Response Settings check boxes.
e. Click Apply.
f. Under the Startup Sequence, select the Managed ELAN IP
address and move it directly above the Managed CLAN IP
address.
g. Under the Shutdown Sequence, select the Managed ELAN
IP address and move it directly below the Managed CLAN IP
address.
h. Click Apply.

9 Attach drive E to one of the High Availability servers.

a. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >
Data Sources.
b. Right-click drive E.
c. Select Attach Data Source.
10 Replace the old Managed ELAN IP address with the new Managed
ELAN IP address in the AutoStart_Configuration.ini file that is in
the E:\Nortel\HA folder.

11 Detach drive E.
a. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >
Data Sources.
b. Right-click drive E.
c. Select Detach Data Source.
12 Open the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure trigger and move Managed
ELAN IP to the Selected Items.

13 Click Apply.
14 Bring the resource group online. For more information, see "Bringing
the CallPilot resource group online" (page 214).

15 Enable the AutoStart Monitoring. For more information, see

"Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)" (page 219).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 163

—End—

Change the administrator account password for the Utility Processes

The administrator passwords must be the same on both High Availability
servers.
On the active server, you can use either the Windows utility or the
Configuration Wizard to change the administrator password after the
AutoStart Monitoring is disabled. However, on the standby server, you must
use the Windows utility to change the administrator passwords.
When the administrator password is changed on both servers, you must
also update the administrator password used by the AutoStart utilities in the
AutoStart Console as described in the following procedure.

Changing the Utility Processes administrator password

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console, expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Utility

Processes.
Result: The Utility Processes are displayed:
• DisableAOS
• KillServices
• LoadDN
• LoadTSP
• UnloadTSP
• UnloadTSPOnStandbyServer

2 Click one of the utilities to open the utility.

Result: The Settings tab for that utility appears.
3 In the Login Info area, enter the new the administrator password in
the Password and Confirm fields.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
164 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 84
Change the administrator password

4 Click Apply.

5 Repeat the preceding steps for each of the remaining utilities in the
Utility Processes list.

—End—

Increase software licenses

The following procedure provides the steps for adding additional seats
(using a new keycode) to a pair of High Availability servers.
Only one server in the pair is in service at a time, and therefore, both servers
share one dongle. As a result, they both have the same serial number and
share the same keycode. The information in the keycode is stored in the
CallPilot database so it is automatically mirrored to the standby server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 165

Increasing software licenses on a pair of CallPilot 5.0 1005r or

1006r High Availability servers
Step Action

1 Use the AutoStart Console to stop monitoring (to disable automatic

failovers).
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).

2 On the active CallPilot server (CP1), log on to CallPilot Manager.

a. Launch Internet Explorer.
b. Enter http://<Active Server Name (CP1) or IP address>/cpmgr
in the URL address box.
Result: The CallPilot Manager Logon Web page appears.
c. Log on using your existing CallPilot logon information. Enter
information into the following:
• Mailbox Number—Enter your existing mailbox number.
• Password—Enter your password.
• Server—Specify the name or the IP address of the CallPilot
server that you want to configure. (The server name may
have changed during the upgrade or platform migration.)

Note: When you launch Internet Explorer, you may see a

dialog box that says "M/S IE Enhanced Security config is
currently enabled on your server. This advanced level of
security reduces risk." Nortel recommends that you do not
lower the security level. Nortel also recommends that you do
not select the check box to not show the message again. If
you do lower the security level and you try to access a Web
site off the server, it may be blocked by the security setting.
You do not receive a warning, but a blank screen appears.

d. Click Login.

3 Run the Configuration Wizard and enter the new keycode.

a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration
Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either
an Express or Standard setup.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
166 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.

Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen
appears.
c. Select the CallPilot System Configuration (Standard Mode)
option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome screen appears.
d. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number screen appears.
e. Enter your Serial number and the new Keycode. This new
keycode includes the increased licenses.
f. Ensure that the Serial number and Keycode are correct, and
then click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification screen appears.
g. Ensure that the details on the Feature Verification screen match
your expectations and click Next.
Note: If a feature is missing or is not what you expected,
acquire a new keycode from your Nortel distributor.

Result: The Server Information screen appears.

h. Verify the information on the Server Information screen, modify it
if necessary, and then click Next.
Result: The Password Information screen appears.
i. Select the Leave the password unchanged option. (If
prompted, change the default password. Store the password
in a safe location.)
j. Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation screen appears.
k. Verify the number of MPB boards and, if applicable, DSP cards,
and ensure that they match the hardware installed in the CallPilot
server. Verify the Port Allocations.
l. Click Next.
Result: The Switch Information screen appears.
m. Ensure that the following settings are correct on the Switch
Information screen and click Next.
Result: The CDN Information screen appears.
n. Verify the CDN configuration and click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 167

Result: The Language Source Directory screen appears.

o. Select the Skip Language Installation option.
p. Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen
appears.
q. Verify the settings on the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface
page. Do not change any settings. Ensure that the High
Availability mode check box is selected and the HB1, HB2, and
MIRROR information is correct.
r. Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.
s. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
t. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information.
After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box
reminds you to restart the server for the configuration to take
effect.
u. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.
v. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.

4 If prompted, restart the server after the Configuration Wizard is

complete.
5 Use the AutoStart Console to start monitoring (to enable automatic
failovers). For more information, see "Enabling automatic failovers
(start monitoring)" (page 219).

6 Ensure that the CallPilot resource group is online. If it is not online,

bring the resource group online (which starts up CallPilot). For more
information, see "Bring a resource group online" (page 214).

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
168 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Increasing software licenses and CallPilot channel capacity on a

pair of CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r High Availability servers.
Step Action

1 Use the AutoStart Console to stop monitoring (to disable automatic

failovers). For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers
(stop monitoring)" (page 218)

2 On the active CallPilot server (CP1), log on to CallPilot Manager.

a. Launch Internet Explorer.
b. Enter http://<Active Server Name (CP1) or IP address>/cpgmr
in the URL address box.
Result: The CallPilot Manager Logon Web page appears.
c. Log on using your existing CallPilot logon information. Enter
information into the following:
• Mailbox Number—Enter your existing mailbox number.
• Password—Enter your password.
• Server—Specify the name or the IP address of the CallPilot
server that you want to configure. (The server name may
have changed during the upgrade or platform migration.)

ATTENTION
When you launch Internet Explorer, you may see a dialog box that
says "M/S IE Enhanced Security config is currently enabled on
your server. This advanced level of security reduces risk." Nortel
recommends that you do not lower the security level. Nortel also
recommends that you do not select the check box to not show the
message again. If you do lower the security level and you try to
access a Web site off the server, it may be blocked by the security
setting. You do not receive a warning, but a blank screen appears.

d. Click Login.

3 Run the Configuration Wizard and enter the new keycode.

a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration
Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either
an Express or Standard setup.
b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 169

Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen

appears.
c. Select the CallPilot System Configuration (Standard Mode)
option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome screen appears.
d. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number screen appears.
e. Enter your Serial number and the new Keycode. This new
keycode includes the increased licenses and channels.
f. Ensure that the Serial number and Keycode are correct, and
then click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification screen appears.
g. Ensure that the details on the Feature Verification screen match
your expectations and click Next.

ATTENTION
If a feature is missing or is not what you expected, acquire a new keycode
from your Nortel distributor.

Result: The Server Information screen appears.

h. Verify the information on the Server Information screen, modify it
if necessary, and then click Next.
Result:The Password Information screen appears.
i. Select the Leave the password unchanged option. (If
prompted, change the default password. Store the password
in a safe location.)
j. Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation screen appears.
k. Verify the number of MPB boards and, if applicable, DSP cards,
and ensure that they match the hardware installed in the CallPilot
server. Verify the Port Allocations.
l. Click Next.
Result: The Switch Information screen appears.
m. Add additional switch TNs and ensure that the settings are
correct on the Switch Information screen and click Next.
Result:The CDN Information screen appears.
n. Verify the CDN configuration and click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
170 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Result:The Language Source Directory screen appears.

o. Select the Skip Language Installation option.
p. Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen
appears.
q. Verify the settings on the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface
page. Do not change any settings. Ensure that the High
Availability mode check box is selected and the HB1, HB2, and
MIRROR information is correct.
r. Click Next.
Result:The Ready to Configure screen appears.
s. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
t. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information. After the configuration is applied
to the server, a dialog box reminds you to restart the server for
the configuration to take effect.
u. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.

Result:The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager

screen.
v. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.
w. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP2).
x. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP2, restart CP1.

4 Move the dongle to CP2. For more information about the dongle,
see 1005r Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r
Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-320).
5 On CP2, do the following:
a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drvE and drvF are green and show
as online in the AutoStart Console.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 171

c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.

For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).

6 On the active CallPilot server (CP2), log on to CallPilot Manager.

a. Launch Internet Explorer.
b. Enter http://<Active Server Name (CP2) or IP address>/cpmgr
in the URL address box.
Result: The CallPilot Manager Logon Web page appears.
c. Log on using your existing CallPilot logon information. Enter
information into the following:
• Mailbox Number— Enter your existing mailbox number.
• Password— Enter your password.
• Server— Specify the name or the IP address of the CallPilot
server that you want to configure. (The server name may
have changed during the upgrade or platform migration.)

ATTENTION
When you launch Internet Explorer, you may see a dialog box that
says "M/S IE Enhanced Security config is currently enabled on
your server. This advanced level of security reduces risk." Nortel
recommends that you do not lower the security level. Nortel also
recommends that you do not select the check box to not show the
message again. If you do lower the security level and you try to
access a Web site off the server, it may be blocked by the security
setting. You do not receive a warning, but a blank screen appears.

d. Click Login.
7 Run the Configuration Wizard and enter the new keycode.
a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration
Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either
an Express or Standard setup.
b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen
appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
172 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

c. Select the CallPilot System Configuration (Standard Mode)

option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome screen appears.
d. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number screen appears.
e. Enter your Serial number and the new Keycode (if required).
This new keycode includes the increased licenses and channels.
f. Ensure that the Serial number and Keycode are correct, and
then click Next.
Result:The Feature Verification screen appears.
g. Ensure that the details on the Feature Verification screen match
your expectations and click Next.

ATTENTION
If a feature is missing or is not what you expected, acquire a new
keycode from your Nortel distributor.

Result: The Server Information screen appears.

h. Verify the information on the Server Information screen, modify it
if necessary, and then click Next.
Result: The Password Information screen appears.
i. Select the Leave the password unchanged option. (If
prompted, change the default password. Store the password
in a safe location.)
j. Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation screen appears.
k. Verify the number of MPB boards and, if applicable, DSP cards,
and ensure that they match the hardware installed in the CallPilot
server. Verify the Port Allocations.
l. Click Next.
Result: The Switch Information screen appears.
m. Add additional switch TNs and ensure that the settings are
correct on the Switch Information screen and click Next.
Result: The CDN Information screen appears.
n. Verify the CDN configuration and click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory screen appears.
o. Select the Skip Language Installation option

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 173

p. Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen
appears.
q. Verify the settings on the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface
page. Do not change any settings. Ensure that the High
Availability mode check box is selected and the HB1, HB2, and
MIRROR information is correct.
r. Click Next.
Result: Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.
s. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
t. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information.
After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box reminds
you to restart the server for the configuration to take effect.
u. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.
v. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.
w. Perform a manual failover. For more information, see "Initiating
a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought
online on the standby High Availability server (CP1).
x. After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.
8 Use the AutoStart Console to start monitoring (to enable automatic
failovers). For more information, see "Enabling automatic failovers
(start monitoring)" (page 219).

—End—

Increase CallPilot channel capacity by adding MPB96 boards

If the pair of 1005r or 1006r servers each have one MPB96 board installed,
the servers can be upgraded to have three MPB96 boards. This hardware
expansion is required if the servers each have one MPB96 board installed
and you want to increase capacity to a value greater than 96 MPUs or 96
channels. Three MPB96 boards have 192 channels and 288 MPUs.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
174 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Increasing channel capacity by adding MPB96 boards in a pair of

CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r High Availability servers
Step Action

1 Disable AutoStart Monitoring. For more information, see "Disabling

automatic failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Take the CallPilot resource group offline. For more information, see
"Take a resource group offline" (page 215).

3 Disable the DisableAOS rule on the AutoStart Console.

4 Power down both servers.

5 Install the two additional MPB96 boards in each server in the High
Availability pair on the field.
6 Connect all the required cables.

7 Power on both servers.

8 On CP1, open Windows Explorer.

9 Navigate to the D:\Nortel\HA\Toolkit Installer 2.0 folder.

10 Run the command HighAvailabilityConfigurationWizard.exe.
Result: The High Availability Configuration Wizard appears.

11 In the Number of MPB96 boards field, select 3.

12 Fill the remaining fields on the High Availability Configuration
Wizard using Step 3 in "Running Stage 1 of the High Availability
Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration" (page
83).

13 On CP1, attach drive E and drive F to the High Availability server.

Perform the following steps for both drive E and drive F.
a. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >
Data Sources.
b. Right-click the drive you want to connect.
c. Select Attach Data Source.
14 Perform step 4 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard. For
more information, see "Running Stage 1 of the High Availability
Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration" (page
83).

15 Import the new definition file on the AutoStart Console.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 175

For more information, see "Importing the AutoStart Definition file"

(page 201).

16 Update the AutoStart Utilities logon information (that is, update

the passwords for each utility as a result of reimporting the new
definition file).
17 On CP1, use the Windows Service utility to manually start the
following CallPilot services individually and in the following order:
• Adaptive Server Anywhere - DB_SQLANY
• CallPilot HAL Monitor
• CallPilot LDAP
• CallPilot AOS (Enable the CallPilot AOS service first)
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 1
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 102
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 103
• CallPilot Multimedia Cache

18 Move the dongle to the CP1 server (if the dongle is not already on
the server).

19 Run the CallPilot Configuration Wizard to change the switch

configuration to match the switch settings.
Result: The Configuration Wizard unloads the CallPilot Database
tables again (which were previously unloaded).
a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration
Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either
an Express or Standard setup.
b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen
appears.
c. Select the CallPilot System Configuration (Standard Mode)
option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome screen appears.
d. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number screen appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
176 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

e. Verify your Serial number and Keycode and then click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification screen appears.
f. Ensure that the details on the Feature Verification screen match
your expectations and click Next.
Note: If a feature is missing or is not what you expected,
acquire a new keycode from your Nortel distributor.

Result: The Server Information screen appears.

g. Verify the information on the Server Information screen, modify it
if necessary, and then click Next.
Result: The Password Information screen appears.
h. Select the Leave the password unchanged option. (If
prompted, change the default passwords. Store passwords in a
safe location.)
i. Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation screen appears.
j. Verify the number of MPB boards and, if applicable, DSP cards,
and ensure that they match the hardware installed in the CallPilot
server.
k. Change the Port Allocations as required.
l. Click Next.
Result: The Switch Information screen appears.
m. Ensure that the following settings are correct:
• Ensure the switch type and the switch IP addresses are
correct.
• If you are expanding the number of channels, configure the
new channels from this screen.
• After you configure the channels, click Next.

Result: The CDN Information screen appears.

n. Verify the CDN configuration.
If you need to make changes, do the following:
i. Click New to add a new CDN.
Result: The system prompts you for the CDN and the name
of the application to dedicate to the CDN.
ii. Specify the CDN, choose the application, and then click OK.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 177

Result: The system returns you to the CDN Information

page.
o. Click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory screen appears.
p. Select the Skip Language Installation option.
q. Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen
appears.
r. Verify the information on the CallPilot Local Area Network
Interface page. Do not change any settings. Ensure that the
High Availability mode check box is selected and that the HB1,
HB2, and MIRROR information is correct.
s. Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.
t. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
u. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information.
After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box
reminds you to restart the server for the configuration to take
effect.
v. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.
w. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.
20 Restart the CP1 server.

21 On CP2, attach drive E and drive F to CP2 from the AutoStart

Console. Perform the following for both drive E and drive F:
a. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >
Data Sources.
b. Right-click the drive you want to connect.
c. Select Attach Data Source.
22 On CP2, use the Windows Service utility to manually start the
following CallPilot services individually and in the following order:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
178 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

• Adaptive Server Anywhere - DB_SQLANY

• CallPilot HAL Monitor
• CallPilot LDAP
• CallPilot AOS (Enable the CallPilot AOS service first)
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 1
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 102
• CallPilot Multimedia Volume 103
• CallPilot Multimedia Cache

23 Move the dongle to CP2.

24 Run the CallPilot Configuration Wizard to change the switch
configuration to match the switch settings.
Result: The Configuration Wizard unloads the CallPilot Database
tables again (which were previously unloaded).
a. On the main CallPilot Manager screen, click the Configuration
Wizard icon.
Tip: You can also start the Configuration Wizard by clicking
Tools > Configuration Wizard.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either
an Express or Standard setup.
b. Select OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Configuration Mode screen
appears.
c. Select the CallPilot System Configuration (Standard Mode)
option and then click Next.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome screen appears.
d. On the Welcome screen, click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number screen appears.
e. Verify your Serial number and Keycode.
Result: The Feature Verification screen appears.
f. Ensure that the details on the Feature Verification screen match
your expectations and click Next.
Note: If a feature is missing or is not what you expected,
acquire a new keycode from your Nortel distributor.

Result: The Server Information screen appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 CallPilot Configuration Wizard 179

g. Verify the information on the Server Information screen, modify it

if necessary, and then click Next.
Result: The Password Information screen appears.
h. Select the Leave the password unchanged option. (If
prompted, change the default passwords. Save the password
in a safe location.)
i. Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation screen appears.
j. Verify the number of MPB boards and, if applicable, DSP cards,
and ensure that they match the hardware installed in the CallPilot
server.
k. Change the Port Allocations as required.
l. Click Next.
Result: The Switch Information screen appears.
m. Ensure that the following settings are correct:
• Ensure the switch type and the switch IP addresses are
correct.
• If you are expanding the number of channels, configure the
new channels from this screen.
• After you configure the channels, click Next.

Result: The CDN Information screen appears.

n. Verify the CDN configuration.
If you need to make changes, do the following:
i. Click New to add a new CDN.
Result: The system prompts you for the CDN and the name
of the application to dedicate to the CDN.
ii. Specify the CDN, choose the application, and then click OK.
Result: The system returns you to the CDN Information
page.
o. Click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory screen appears.
p. Select the Skip Language Installation option.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen
appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
180 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

q. Verify the information on the CallPilot Local Area Network

Interface page. Do not change any settings. Ensure that the
High Availability mode check box is selected and that the HB1,
HB2, and MIRROR information is correct.
r. Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.
s. Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.
t. Click OK to configure CallPilot.
Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete. The Configuration Wizard
displays progress information.
After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box
reminds you to restart the server for the configuration to take
effect.
u. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.
Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.
v. Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.

25 Restart the CP2 server.

26 Ensure that both servers are completely started.

27 Bring the CallPilot resource group online on either of the two High
Availability servers. For more information, see "Bringing the CallPilot
resource group online" (page 214).

—End—

Working with domains and workgroups

Use the procedures in this section to work with domains and workgroups.

Moving from a domain to a workgroup

If the CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system must be moved to a workgroup
(from a domain), use the following procedure to join a workgroup.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Working with domains and workgroups 181

Joining a workgroup
Step Action
This procedure assumes that CP1 is the active server and CP2 is the
standby server.

1 On CP1, launch the AutoStart Console and stop monitoring.

For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
2 Take the CallPilot resource group offline on CP1. For more
information, see "Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page
216).

3 On CP1, do the following:

a. Right-click My Computer.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
b. Select the Computer Name tab and click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
Figure 85
Computer Name Changes

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
182 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

c. In the Member of section, select the Workgroup option.

d. Enter the name of the workgroup and click OK.
Result: The Domain Administrator Privileges window appears.
e. Enter the domain administrator and password.
Contact your network administrator for this information.
Result: The Welcome to Workgroup window appears.
f. Click OK.
Result: A warning window appears prompting you to restart the
computer in order for changes to take effect.
g. Click OK.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
h. Click OK.
Result: The System Settings Changes window appears
prompting you to restart the computer.
i. Click Yes to restart CP1.
j. Log on to CP1 using the domain user account which is a member
of the Workgroup Administrators group.
4 On CP2, do the following:
a. Right-click My Computer.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
b. Select the Computer Name tab and click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
c. In the Member of section, select the Workgroup option.
d. Enter the name of the workgroup and click OK.
Result: The Workgroup Administrator Privileges window
appears.
e. Enter the workgroup administrator and password.
Contact your network administrator for this information.
Result: The Welcome to Workgroup window appears.
f. Click OK.
Result: A warning window appears prompting you to restart the
computer in order for changes to take effect.
g. Click OK.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Working with domains and workgroups 183

Result: The System Properties window appears.

h. Click OK.
Result: The System Settings Changes window appears
prompting you to restart the computer.
i. Click Yes to restart CP2.
j. Log on to CP2 using the domain user account which is a member
of the Domain Administrators group.

5 On CP1, launch the AutoStart Console window.

6 Expand Domains.

7 Expand [AutoStart_Domain]. (This is the domain name created

when the AutoStart agent was installed.)
8 Expand Utility Processes.
Result: The Utility Processes are displayed:
• DisableAOS
• KillServices
• LoadDN
• LoadTSP
• UnloadTSP
• UnloadTSPOnStandbyServer

9 Select the DisableAOS Utility Process.

10 Select the Settings tab and to the following:
a. Update the Domain, User Name, and Directory fields.
• Domain must be the Windows domain that the CallPilot
servers are on (if applicable) or the Windows workgroup in
which the servers are located.
• User name must be the domain administrator account for
selected domain.
• The default directory is D:\Nortel\Data\HA\HA_DB_Scripts.

b. In the Login Info section, enter the password for the Windows
administrator account in the Password and Confirm fields.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
184 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 86
AutoStart Console - Utility Processes

c. Click Apply.

11 Repeat Step 10 for each of the remaining Utility Processes.

12 On CP1, enable monitoring. For more information, see "Enabling

automatic failovers (start monitoring)" (page 219).

13 Bring the CallPilot resource group online on CP1. For more

information, see "Bringing the CallPilot resource group online" (page
214).

—End—

Manually change the administrator password

If you must change the password of the local administrator account or the
password of the domain administrator account, the password must be
changed on both High Availability servers.
Use the following procedure if you must change the password of the local
administrator account or the password of the domain administrator account.
The administrator password must be the same on both servers in the High
Availability pair.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Working with domains and workgroups 185

Manually changing the password of the local administrator

account or the domain administrator account
Step Action

1 On CP1 (the active High Availability server) do the following:

a. Ensure the dongle is plugged into CP1. If the dongle is not on
CP1, move it to CP1 and wait for 3 minutes.
For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-320).
b. Launch the AutoStart Console.
c. Stop monitoring on the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)"
(page 218).

2 On CP1, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to display the Windows Security

window.
3 Click Change Password.
Result: The Change Password window appears.

4 Enter the User Name of the administrator account.

5 From the Log on to field, select one of the following:

• If on a workgroup, select the local host name of the computer.
For example, P1005r (this computer).
• If on a domain, select the domain name associated with the
computer. For example, nortel.innlab.com
Note: If you are on a domain, both the local host name and
the domain name are available in the Log on to drop-down
list. Select the name you want to change.

6 Enter the Old Password.

7 Enter the New Password.

8 Reenter the new password in the Confirm New Password field.

9 Click OK.

10 Perform a manual failover on CP1. For more information, see

"Initiating a manual failover" (page 220).
Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought online
on the standby High Availability server (CP2).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
186 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

11 Restart CP1.

12 Move the dongle to CP2.

For more information about the dongle, see 1005r Server Hardware
Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server Hardware Installation
(NN44200-320).

13 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP1 and both drvE and drvF are green/online in
the AutoStart Console.
c. If required, disable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).

14 On CP2, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to display the Windows Security

window.
15 Click Change Password.
Result: The Change Password window appears.
16 Enter the User Name of the administrator account.

17 From the Log on to field, select one of the following:

• If on a workgroup, select the local host name of the computer.
For example, P1005r (this computer).
• If on a domain, select the domain name associated with the
computer. For example, nortel.innlab.com
Note: If you are on a domain, both the local host name and
the domain name are available in the Log on to drop-down
list. Select the name you want to change.

18 Enter the Old Password.

19 Enter the New Password.

20 Reenter the new password in the Confirm New Password field.

21 Click OK.

22 Change the administrator password for each of the Utility Processes.

For more information, see "Changing the Utility Processes
administrator password" (page 163).
23 Perform a manual failover on CP2. For more information, see
"Initiating a manual failover" (page 220).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 187

Result: The CallPilot resource group is automatically brought online

on the standby High Availability server (CP1).

24 After the CallPilot resource group is online on CP1, restart CP2.

25 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Wait until node CP2 and both drvE and drvF are online/green in
the AutoStart Console.
c. Enable monitoring for the CallPilot resource group. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).

—End—

EMC AutoStart Agent and Console

The EMC AutoStart software is used to maintain a High Availability system.
This section includes the following:
• "AutoStart maintenance" (page 187)
• "Work with resource groups" (page 213)
• "Software operations" (page 221)

AutoStart maintenance
Use the procedures in this section to perform maintenance tasks within the
EMC AutoStart software.
• "Configure the AutoStart notification settings" (page 188)
• "Add e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule"
(page 191)
• "Configure failover on the Path Test failures of the Managed ELAN IP
address" (page 194)
• "License administration" (page 196)
• "Check the status of the servers and failovers using AutoStart" (page
197)
• "Import and export of the AutoStart Definition file" (page 200)
• "Recreate the AutoStart definition file" (page 203)
• "Change the Switch IP address in AutoStart Console" (page 209)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
188 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Configure the AutoStart notification settings

The AutoStart software can provide e-mail notification for failovers and
resource group state changes. The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
server domain must first be configured for recipients to receive notification
that a failover or state change has occurred.

Configuring the SMTP Server for a domain

Step Action

1 From the AutoStart Console, select Domains > [AutoStart_Domain]

for the domain that you want to monitor.

2 Select the Settings tab.

Figure 87
Setting the SMTP server attribute value

3 Under the Notification area, enter the SMTP Server, SMTP

Gateway, and SMTP Community.

4 Under the Attributes area, click the attribute to edit.

5 In the Value field, enter the name of the SMTP server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 189

For example, mail.servername.com.

6 Repeat for each attribute.

7 Click Apply.
Result: When the SMTP server is in the domain attributes, the Send
Email To text box (on the Options tab) becomes active. However,
this value does not become active until the agents are restarted.

—End—

Configuring the User Notification Settings

Step Action

1 Expand Domains > [AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups >

CallPilot.

2 Select the Options tab.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
190 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 88
Options tab - User Notification Settings

3 To receive a notification e-mail that the state of a resource group

has changed, do the following:
a. In the Send Email to field, enter the e-mail addresses of those
who must receive notification that a failover has occurred.
b. Under the User Notification Settings, select the Notify on
State Change check box.

4 To receive a notification e-mail when a node group failover occurs,

do the following:
a. In the Send Email to field, enter the e-mail addresses of those
who must receive notification that a failover has occurred.
b. Under the User Notification Settings, select the Notify on
Node Group Failover check box.

5 Click Apply.
6 Perform a manual failover to test if notification is received.
See "Initiating a manual failover" (page 220).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 191

—End—

Add e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif

rule
Use the following procedure to add e-mail addresses into the script of the
Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule so that the AutoStart software can
send out notification e-mail to the administrators when the Path Test failure
of the Managed ELAN IP occurs.

Adding e-mail addresses to the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule

after the system is configured
Step Action

1 Open the AutoStart Console.

2 Take the CallPilot resource group offline (if it is online). See "Taking
the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).
3 On the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Rules.

4 Select Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif.
Result: The Settings tab for the Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif
rule appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
192 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 89
Rules - Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif

5 Select the Rule Script tab.

Result: The rule script appears in the right pane of the AutoStart
Console.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 193

Figure 90
Rule Script tab for Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif rule

6 Look for the @recipientList = () line in the rule script.

7 Add the recipient’s e-mail address in the parenthesis () of the

@recipientList line. You must add the backslash symbol (\) before
the at symbol (@) in the e-mail address.
If multiple e-mail addresses are added, separate each e-mail
address by a comma (,).

8 Click Apply.
9 Bring the CallPilot resource group online (if it was taken offline at the
beginning of this procedure). See "Bringing the CallPilot resource
group online" (page 214).

10 Configure the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server so that

the AutoStart software can provide e-mail notification for failovers
and resource group state changes. The SMTP server domain must
first be configured for recipients to receive notification that a failover
or state change has occurred. See "Configuring the SMTP Server
for a domain" (page 188).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
194 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

—End—

Configure failover on the Path Test failures of the Managed

ELAN IP address
There is a small chance (less than 1%) that the Midnight Audit will trigger
a failover because of the very short switch ELAN down time if the High
Availability system connects to a Meridian 1 51/61/81 switch instead of
Meridian 1 Option 11C. Use the following procedure to configure failovers
on the Path Test failures of the Managed ELAN IP address.

Configuring failovers on the Path Test failures of the Managed ELAN

IP address
Step Action

1 Open the AutoStart Console.

2 Expand Resource Groups.

3 Take the CallPilot resource group offline. See "Taking the CallPilot
resource group offline" (page 216).

4 For the CallPilot resource group, select the Settings tab.

5 Select the Managed ELAN IP address. For example, 47.0.30.6
(as shown in the following figure).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 195

Figure 91
Settings tab - Managed ELAN IP address

6 Click Edit.
Result: The IP Address Properties window appears.
Figure 92
IP Address Properties

7 Select the check boxes for both of the following options:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
196 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

• Relocate Resource Group on Path Failed State

• Relocate Resource Group on Unassigned State

8 Click Apply.

9 Click Apply again on the Settings tab.

—End—

License administration
During the installation process, the AutoStart software is configured to
use an AutoStart license key that is provided by Nortel with the CallPilot
software. Use the following procedure to update the license key.

Updating the license key

Step Action

1 On the CallPilot server, click Start > Programs > EMC AutoStart >
EMC AutoStart Console 5.3 SP3 to start the AutoStart Console.
Result: The AutoStart Console appears.
2 On the AutoStart Console window, click Domains >
[AutoStart_Domain].

3 Select the Licensing/Security tab.

4 In the New License Key field, enter the new license key.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 197

Figure 93
Licensing/Security tab - New License Key

5 Click Add.
Result: The new license key is added to the list in the License Key
field.
6 From the License Key list, select the newly entered license key.

7 Click Apply.

—End—

Check the status of the servers and failovers using AutoStart

Use the following procedures to check the status of the following:
• Server and failover status
• HB1, HB2, and Mirroring link status

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
198 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Checking the status of the servers and failovers

Step Action

1 On the Console window, expand Domains > [AutoStart_Domain] >

Resource Groups > CallPilot.
2 Select the Status tab.
Figure 94
Status tab

Result: The fields in the Status of Resource Group area show the
status of the system. The AutoStart Console users both icons and
text to show system status (as described in the following two tables).

Table 9
Status of Resource Group fields
Field name Status Description
Monitoring Enabled Automatic failover is enabled.
State
Disabled Automatic failover is disabled.
Unknown AutoStart is unable to determine the failover
status.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 199

Field name Status Description

Group State Online All resources under the current group on the
current active server are up and working.
Offline All resources under the current group on the
current active server are down.
Online Some resources under the current group on
pending the current active server are up; however,
some services are in either starting or
stopping status.
Preferred This area shows all the CallPilot servers and
Nodes their overall status.

Status icons are displayed for each object to indicate the status of
the object. The color of the icon describes the state of the object.

Table 10
Light status
Light Status
Green The object is online and in a working
state.
Blue The object is in a starting state.
Yellow The object is in a warning state.
Yellow with a question mark The object is entering warning state.
Red The object has failed.
Red with a question mark The object is failing.
Gray The object is offline.

In the Status of Resource Group Elements area, the Node column

shows on which server the CallPilot services are up and working.
Usually this column shows one CallPilot server node name (active
CallPilot server name) for all the resource group elements (although
the node names do not have to be the same).

—End—

Checking the status of the HB1, HB2, and Mirroring links

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
200 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console, expand Domain > [AutoStart_Domain]

> NICs.
Figure 95
NICs

2 View the information in the right pane to check the status of the HB1,
HB2, and Mirroring links. The status of the CLAN and ELAN is also
displayed.

—End—

Import and export of the AutoStart Definition file

As part of the AutoStart configuration, the administrator imports the
customized AutoStart Definition file on the AutoStart Console. It is also
possible to export the AutoStart configuration data into a definition file as
a backup after the AutoStart configuration. This section describes the
procedures for importing and exporting the AutoStart Definition file.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 201

Importing the AutoStart Definition file

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console window, expand Domains.

2 Right-click the [AutoStart_Domain] and select Import Domain
Information from the shortcut menu.
Figure 96
Import Domain Information

Result: The Import dialog box appears.

Figure 97
Import dialog box

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
202 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

3 Navigate to the D:\Nortel\HA\ToolkitInstaller2.0 folder (if that folder

is not already open by default).

4 Select one of the following AutoStart definition files:

• CallPilot-Mirroring-Single.def (for systems with one MPB96
board)
• CallPilot-Mirroring.def (for systems with three MPB96 boards)

5 Click Import.
Result: The import process takes up to one minute to complete.

—End—

Exporting the AutoStart Definition file

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console window, expand Domains.

2 Right-click your [AutoStart_Domain] and select Export Domain
Information from the shortcut menu.
Figure 98
Export Domain Information

Result: The Export dialog box appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 203

Figure 99
Export dialog box

3 Select the location and file name for the new definition file to be
created.

4 Click Export to export the AutoStart configuration data into the

new definition file.

—End—

Recreate the AutoStart definition file

Use the following procedure to recreate the AutoStart Definition file. To do
this, you must do the following on the fully configured and running CallPilot
5.0 High Availability system:
• run the High Availability Wizard (HighAvailabilityConfigurationWizard.exe
under D:\Nortel\HA)
• reimport the new definition file into AutoStart Console (*.def under
D:\Nortel\HA\ToolkitInstaller2.0)

For example, you must use this procedure after installing the CallPilot 5.0
PEP, which replaces the AutoStart definition template files used to generate
the definition file on the working CallPilot 5.0 High Availability systems.

Recreating the AutoStart definition file

Step Action

1 Open the AutoStart Console on the High Availability server which

had the original definition file previously imported into AutoStart.
2 Take the CallPilot resource group offline (if it is online). See "Taking
the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
204 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

3 In the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Resource Groups,

right click the CallPilot resource group, and then click Delete
Current Resource Group.
Figure 100
Delete CallPilot resource group

Result: The Confirm Delete of Resource Group window appears.

4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of the CallPilot resource group.

5 In the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Data Sources,

right click drvE, and then click Delete Current Data Source.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 205

Figure 101
Delete drvE

Result: The Confirm Delete of Datasource window appears.

6 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of drvE.

7 In the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Data Sources,

right click drvF, and then click Delete Current Data Source.
Result: The Confirm Delete of Datasource window appears.

8 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of drvF.

9 In the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Rules, right click
DisableAOS, and then click Disable Rule if the rule Disable Rule is
enabled (in green).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
206 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 102
Disable Rule

Result: The Confirm Disable of Rule window appears.

10 Click Yes to confirm the disabling of the rule.

11 Navigate to D:\Nortel\HA folder.

12 Launch HighavailabilityConfigurationWizard.exe.
Result: The High Availability Configuration Wizard appears.

13 Click the Reset button in the High Availability Configuration Wizard.

Note: Do not close High Availability Configuration Wizard at
this time. If you close High Availability Configuration Wizard,
you must reenter the data requested by the High Availability
Configuration Wizard.

14 Click Step 1: Get Node Information.

15 Click Step 2: Validate Node Information.
Result: The Stage 1 Complete window appears if there are errors.

16 On the Stage 1 Complete window, click OK.

17 Close the High Availability Configuration Wizard.

Result: The Confirm Exit Request window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 207

18 Click Yes.

19 Navigate to D:\Nortel\HA folder.

20 Launch HighavailabilityConfigurationWizard.exe.
Result: The High Availability Configuration Wizard appears.

21 Click Step 3: Generate Definition File.

Result: The Phase 2 Complete window appears when the definition
file has been successfully generated.

22 Click OK.

23 Close the High Availability Configuration Wizard.

Result: The Confirm Exit Request window appears.

24 Click Yes.
25 In the AutoStart Console, right click the [AutoStart_Domain] name
and then click Import Domain Information.
Figure 103
Import Domain Information

Result: The Import dialog box appears.

26 Under the D:\Nortel\HA\ToolkitInstaller2.0 folder, select the new
definition file, and then click Import.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
208 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 104
Import dialog box

27 Wait for approximately one minute.

28 Verify that the import was successful:

• the drvE and drvF data sources are created.
• the CallPilot resource group is created
• no error message or warning message appears in the information
bar at the bottom of the AutoStart Console

Also check that any new items or new settings introduced

by the new definition file are created. For example, the
new trigger Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure and the new rule
Managed_ELAN_IP_Failure_Notif.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 209

Figure 105
Successful import

29 In the left pane of the AutoStart Console, expand Utility Processes,

and update the Login Information (Password, Domain name,
and User name) on the Settings tab of each utility process under
Utility Processes (DisableAOS, KillServices, LoadDN, LoadTSP,
UnloadTSP, and UnloadTSPOnSandbyServer). See "Adding the
Windows administrator account password for the AutoStart Utility
Processes" (page 115).
30 Bring the CallPilot resource group online. See "Bringing the CallPilot
resource group online" (page 214).

—End—

Change the Switch IP address in AutoStart Console

If the switch IP address is changed, you must update the switch IP address
in multiple locations:
• The switch IP address used in NIC Group Test IP on the Testing Options
page of the ELAN NIC group.
• The switch IP address used on the Network Isolation Addresses list on
the Isolation Settings page of the AutoStart domain.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
210 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

• The switch IP address used in the list IP Addresses to Test on the

Network Path Testing page of the Virtual ELAN IP Address (Managed
ELAN IP Address) on AutoStart Console.

If the switch IP has to be changed, you must use the following procedure to
update the switch IP on a CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system.

Changing the switch IP address

Step Action

1 Disable the monitoring on the AutoStart Console.

For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Change the ELAN IP address on the switch.

3 Expand NIC Groups on the left pane of the AutoStart Console.

4 Select the NIC group with the ELAN subnet IP address.

5 Click the Testing Options tab.
Result: The Testing Options page appears.

6 In the NIC Group Test IPs area, select the NIC Group Test IP
address that has the old switch IP address.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 211

Figure 106
Testing Option tab

7 Click Delete IP Address to delete the old IP address.

8 Enter the new switch IP Address.

9 Click Add IP Address.

10 Click Apply.

11 In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain].

12 Click the Isolation Settings tab.

Result: The Isolation Settings page appears.

13 In the Network Isolation Addresses area, select the old switch IP

address from the IP Address list.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
212 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 107
Isolation Settings tab

14 Click Delete IP Address.

15 Enter the new switch IP Address.

16 Click Add IP Address.

17 Click Apply.

18 In the AutoStart Console, expand IP Addresses.

19 Click the IP Address that is the Managed ELAN IP address.

20 Click the Network Path Testing tab.

Result: The Network Path Testing page appears.
21 In the IP Address to Test area, select the old switch IP address
from the IP Address list.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 213

Figure 108
Network Path Testing tab

22 Click Delete IP Address to delete the old IP address.

23 Enter the new switch IP Address.

24 Click Add IP Address.

25 Click Apply.

—End—

Work with resource groups

A resource group is a collection of resources (such as CallPilot services,
disks, scripts) that must be managed as a group.
This section includes the following procedures:
• "Bring a resource group online" (page 214)
• "Take a resource group offline" (page 215)
• "Perform failovers and monitoring" (page 217)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
214 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Bring a resource group online

You must bring all the AutoStart resource groups online to make the CallPilot
5.0 High Availability system work after importing the AutoStart definition file
(which is imported to configure AutoStart environment).
Use the following procedure to bring a resource group online by bringing
the CallPilot resource group online.

Bringing the CallPilot resource group online

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console window, select Domains > Resource

Groups.

2 Right-click the CallPilot resource group.

3 From the shortcut menu, select the Bring Online option, and then
select the node name on which the CallPilot resource group will
be brought up.
Figure 109
CallPilot resource group - Bring Online

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 215

4 Wait until the Group State turns green and shows Online. This can
take a few minutes.
Figure 110
CallPilot resource group is online

—End—

Take a resource group offline

The failover CallPilot resource group CallPilot is occasionally taken offline
for maintenance. After the CallPilot resource group is taken offline, the
following occurs:
• There is no access to the mirrored drives (that is, no access to the
CallPilot database and MMFS volumes).
• All services are stopped.
• The Windows operating system continues to function (along with IIS
and WWW).

Use the following procedure to take a resource group offline by taking the
CallPilot resource group offline.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
216 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Taking the CallPilot resource group offline

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console window, select Domains > Resource

Groups.
2 Right-click the CallPilot resource group.

3 From the shortcut menu, select the Take Offline option.

Figure 111
CallPilot resource group - Take Offline

4 Wait until the Group State turns gray and shows Offline. This can
take a few minutes.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 217

Figure 112
CallPilot resource group is offline

—End—

Perform failovers and monitoring

Use the procedures in this section to enable and disable automatic failovers,
and to initiate a manual failover.

Automatic failovers
When performing maintenance on the active or standby server, it can be
necessary to temporarily disable automatic failovers from the active to the
standby CallPilot server. You can later enable the automatic failover.
Using the AutoStart console software, you can disable and enable automatic
failovers by performing the following procedures.
Disabling an automatic failover is the same as stopping monitoring, and
enabling an automatic failover is the same as starting monitoring.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
218 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Disabling automatic failovers (stop monitoring)

Step Action
Assumption: This procedures assumes that automatic failovers are currently
enabled.

1 On AutoStart Console window, expand Domains >

[AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups and then select
CallPilot.

2 Click the Status tab.

3 Right-click Resource Groups > CallPilot.

4 From the shortcut menu, select Stop Monitoring.
Figure 113
Stop Monitoring

Result: On the Status tab, the Monitoring State turns to yellow and
shows a status of Disabled. On the Domains pane, the Resource
Groups > CallPilot changes to a green light with a black question
mark. The automatic failover is disabled.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 219

Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)

Step Action
Assumption: This procedure assumes that automatic failovers are currently
disabled.

1 On the AutoStart Console window, expand Domains >

[AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups and then select
CallPilot.

2 Click the Status tab.

3 Right-click Resource Groups > CallPilot.

4 From the shortcut menu, select Monitor Resource Group.
Figure 114
Monitor Resource Group

Result: On Status tab, the Monitoring State turns to green and

shows a status of Enabled. On the Domains pane, the Resource
Groups > CallPilot changes to green. The automatic failover is
enabled.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
220 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Manual failovers
If you are the administrator, you can perform a manual failover if there is a
problem on the active CallPilot server that is not detected by the automatic
failover rules.

Initiating a manual failover

Step Action

1 On the AutoStart Console window, expand Domains >

[AutoStart_Domain] > Resource Groups and then select
CallPilot.

2 Click the Status tab.

Result: The Status tab shows the status of the Resource Groups.
For this procedure, the CallPilot server cplab261a is used as an
example. Notice that this server is active (green and shows Online).
3 Right-click Resource Groups > CallPilot.

4 On the shortcut menu, select Relocate Resource Group, and then

select the <standby CallPilot server>. (This server is the standby
CallPilot server.)
Figure 115
Status tab

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 221

Note: This action stops the CallPilot services on the active

server. This action also puts the standby server in service (that
is, makes it the active server).

Result: The Confirm Relocated of Resource Group dialog box

appears.
Figure 116
Confirm Relocate of Resource Group

5 Click Yes.
Result: The failover starts in seconds. It takes more than 10 minutes
to finish the failover to the standby server if the CallPilot Diagnostic
Tools are enabled, or less than 5 minutes if the CallPilot Diagnostic
Tools are disabled. (Start > Programs > CallPilot > System Utilities
> Diagnostic Tools)

—End—

Software operations
Use the following procedures to install, uninstall, and reinstall the EMC
AutoStart software.
• "Install the AutoStart Console on a stand-alone PC" (page 221)
• "Uninstall the AutoStart software" (page 231)
• "Reinstall the AutoStart software" (page 234)
• "EMC software updates (AutoStart Agent/Console)" (page 234)

Install the AutoStart Console on a stand-alone PC

The AutoStart Console is used to administer the AutoStart Agent that
provides the mirroring and heartbeat signals between the active and standby
CallPilot servers. The AutoStart Console also provides the managed
(virtual) IP service that is used on the CLAN and ELAN to mask the fact
that there are two different servers.
By default, the AutoStart Console software is installed on both CallPilot
servers. However, it is possible to install the AutoStart Console software
on a stand-alone PC.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
222 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

After the AutoStart Console is installed on a stand-alone PC, it can be

used to manage multiple pairs of CallPilot High Availability servers (that
is, multiple AutoStart domains). Use the following procedure to install the
AutoStart Console software on a stand-alone PC for administration of the
Nortel server subnet (CLAN).

Installing the AutoStart Console on a stand-alone PC

Step Action

1 Insert the CallPilot Application CD.

2 Navigate to the Z:\EMC folder on the CallPilot Application CD.

3 Double-click EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.exe to unpack the

archive in theD:\temp folder.
Result: Three files are unpacked into the D:\temp\EMC_Au-
toStart_5.3_SP3_Update folder: EAS53_WIN_x86.exe,
EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe, EMC AutoStart Update Process.pdf

4 Double-click EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe to start the installation.

Result: The installShield Wizard informs you that AutoStart 5.3
SP3 software is preparing to install (install preparation can take a
few minutes). After preparation is complete, the Welcome window
appears.
Figure 117
InstallShield Wizard - Preparing to install AutoStart 5.3 SP3 software

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 223

Figure 118
Welcome window

5 Click Next.
Result:AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder to read the documents appears.
Figure 119
Reminder to read the documents

6 Click Yes, I have read the documents.

Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder is closed.

7 Click Next on the Welcome window.

Result:The License Agreement window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
224 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 120
License Agreement window

8 Select the I accept the terms in the license agreement option.

9 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Setup window appears.
Figure 121
Custom Setup window

10 Click the AutoStart Agent drop-down list and then select This
feature will not be available.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 225

Figure 122
Custom Setup - AutoStart Agent configuration

Result: The Custom Setup window shows a red X next to AutoStart

Agent option.
Figure 123
Custom Setup - AutoStart Agent will not be installed

11 Select theAutoStart Console 5.3 SP3 from the list.

Result: The Change button is highlighted.

12 Click theChange button to change the installation path.

Result:The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
226 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 124
Change Current Destination Folder dialog box

13 In the Folder name field, change the drive letter from C to D, change
the path to: D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart\

ATTENTION
You must install the software in the D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart\
directory or the software does not work correctly.

14 Click OK
Result: The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box closes
and you are returned to the Custom Setup window, which shows the
correct installation path.
15 Click Next
Result: The Confirm Settings window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 227

Figure 125
Confirm Settings window

16 Click Install.
Result: The Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window appears.
Figure 126
Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3

17 Wait for the installation to complete.

Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
228 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 127
InstallShield Wizard Completed window

18 Click Finish

19 Delete the folder D:\temp\EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.

—End—

In order for the AutoStart Console (on the stand-alone PC) to manage
an AutoStart domain (that is, a pair of CallPilot High Availability servers),
the user ID used to log on to the stand-alone PC must be registered in
the AutoStart domain that is to be managed. To do this, you must do the
following:
1. Add the user ID into the Valid User List of the AutoStart domain on the
AutoStart Console installed on one of the High Availability servers.
For more information, see "Adding a user ID to the AutoStart domain"
(page 228).
2. After the user ID is registered, create a connection to the pair of
High Availability servers by launching the AutoStart Console on the
stand-alone PC and enter the AutoStart domain name and node names.
For more information, see "Adding a remote AutoStart domain to the
AutoStart Console" (page 230).

Adding a user ID to the AutoStart domain

Step Action

1 Launch the AutoStart Console on either of the two servers that are
members of the AutoStart domain.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 229

2 Expand Domains.

3 Select the Licensing/Security tab.

Figure 128
Licensing/Security tab

4 In the User Name field, enter the user ID of the user who must be
given access to the AutoStart domain.

5 In the Domain/Node field, enter one of the following:

• The Windows domain name, if the user has a Windows domain
user ID.
• The server name that the user ID is defined on, if the user is not
a member of a Windows domain.

6 For the Access Rights field, select either the User, Operator, or
Administrator option.

7 Click Add.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
230 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 129
Add user

Result: The user is added to the Valid User List.

—End—

Adding a remote AutoStart domain to the AutoStart Console

Step Action

1 Launch the AutoStart Console that is installed on the stand-alone

PC.
Result: The New Domain dialog box appears.
Note: If the AutoStart Console does not launch automatically,
select Action > Open New Domain to display the New Domain
dialog.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 231

Figure 130
New Domain

2 In the Domain Name field, enter the name of the AutoStart domain
to which you want to connect.

3 In the Node List field, enter a comma-separated list of the two node
names that are members of the AutoStart domain to which you want
to connect.

4 Click Apply.
Result: The AutoStart Console window updates and the newly
added AutoStart domain is connected using the user ID that is
currently logged on to the stand-alone PC.

—End—

Uninstall the AutoStart software

Use the following procedure if you must uninstall the AutoStart software.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
232 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Uninstalling the AutoStart software

Step Action

1 Launch the AutoStart Console.

2 In the AutoStart Console, take the CallPilot resource group offline.

For more information, see "Take a resource group offline" (page 215).

3 Remove the CallPilot resource group by doing the following:

a. Right-click the CallPilot Resource group.
b. Select Remove Current Resource Group.

4 Delete the data sources (drive E and drive F).

5 Close the AutoStart Console.

6 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.

7 Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel.

Result: The Add or Remove Programs window appears.

8 Select AutoStart 5.3 SP3 from the list.

Figure 131
Add or Remove Programs - AutoStart 5.3 SP3

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 EMC AutoStart Agent and Console 233

9 Click Remove.
Result:The Add or Remove Programs conformation window
appears.
Figure 132
Add or Remove Programs – confirmation window

10 Click Yes
Result: Uninstalling EMC AutoStart window appears and displays
the progress of uninstallation.
Figure 133
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer - Status of uninstallation

If the AutoStart Console is in use, the following message appears.

Close the AutoStart Console and click Retry to continue.
Figure 134
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer - AutoStart Console is in use

11 The AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer Information dialog box appears.

12 Click Yes to restart the node.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
234 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Figure 135
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer Information

—End—

Reinstall the AutoStart software

Use the following procedure if you must uninstall and then reinstall the
AutoStart software. This procedure must be completed on both servers
in the High Availability pair.

Reinstalling the AutoStart software

Step Action
This procedure must be used on each node of a CallPilot High Availability
pair.

1 Uninstall the AutoStart patches by doing the following:

a. Rerun each patch.
b. Select the Remove option.

2 Uninstall the AutoStart Console by following the procedure

"Uninstalling the AutoStart software" (page 232), which first deletes
the AutoStart Data Sources.

3 Reinstall the AutoStart Agent and Console, including their patches.

For more information, see "Install the AutoStart Agent and Console
software " (page 86).
4 Restart the server.

—End—

EMC software updates (AutoStart Agent/Console)

Nortel must approve all EMC AutoStart updates. Do not apply any software
updates unless the update is provided by Nortel. Contact your support
organization for more information.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 235

All of the required EMC software is included on the CallPilot 5.0 Applications
CD. This version of the EMC software is tested and verified to work correctly
with the CallPilot 5.0 High Availability feature. The EMC software on the
CallPilot server must not be updated or patched unless the new software or
patch is tested and validated by Nortel.

Support
Install PEPs
To ensure that the pair of CallPilot servers functions correctly, both CallPilot
servers must be running the same PEPs and Service Updates (SUs). Due
to the mirroring software, the mirrored drives cannot be accessed on the
standby server. As a result, PEPs that impact the database or MMFS must
be installed on the active CallPilot server.
This section includes the procedure for installing PEPs.

ws
Step Action
In this procedure, CP1 is the active server and CP2 is the standby server.
This process causes the servers to go out of service while the PEPs are
installed.

ATTENTION
Please make sure that both nodes are in the green status on the Nodes list of
the AutoStart Console.

1 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Stop monitoring for CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2]
resource groups.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
c. Take CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] resource
groups offline (shut down CallPilot).
For more information, see "Taking the CallPilot resource group
offline" (page 216).
d. Wait for all resource groups to go offline.
e. Attach the mirror drives, drive E and drive F (Note: Repeat the
steps i, ii, iii on drive E and drive F) to CP1 so that the disks can
be accessed from CP1.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
236 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

ATTENTION
Attaching and detaching drives can take a few minutes.

i. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain]

> Data Sources.
ii. Right-click the drive you want to connect.
iii. Select Attach Data Source.
f. Install the PEPs.
Note: The PEP code is enhanced so that it starts any
CallPilot services that it needs to have running (for example,
the database).

g. Detach the data source.

i. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain]
> Data Sources.
ii. Right-click the drive/data source.
iii. Select Detach Data Source.
h. Restart the server (if required).
Result: CP1 now has the new software, registry settings, and
database updates. Because the resource group is offline and
monitoring is disabled, CallPilot does not automatically restart after
the restart.

ATTENTION
Wait till the CP1 is turned to green on the Nodes list of the AutoStart
Console.

2 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Attach the mirror drives (drive E and drive F) to CP2 so the disks
can be accessed from CP2.

ATTENTION
Attaching and detaching drives can take a few minutes.

i. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain]

> Data Sources.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 237

ii. Right-click the drive you want to connect.

iii. Select Attach Data Source.
c. Install the PEPs.

ATTENTION
The PEP code is enhanced so that it starts any CallPilot services that
it needs to have running (for example, the database).

d. Restart the server (if required).

Result: CP2 now has the new software, registry settings, and
database updates. Because the resource group is offline and
monitoring is disabled, CallPilot does not automatically restart after
the restart.

ATTENTION
Please refer to the CP5.0 DTR or the PEP README files to see whether
or not there is any additional procedure which has to be done before the
next step or bringing the resource group CallPilot online.

3 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Start monitoring for CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2]
resource groups (to enable automatic failovers).
For more information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start
monitoring)" (page 219).
c. Bring CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] resource
groups online (start up CallPilot).
For more information, see "Bringing the CallPilot resource group
online" (page 214).
Result: Both servers are updated with the PEPs.

—End—

Uninstall PEPs
To ensure that the pair of CallPilot servers functions correctly, both CallPilot
servers must be running the same PEPs and Service Updates (SUs). Due
to the mirroring software, the mirrored drives cannot be accessed on the
standby server. As a result, PEPs that impact the database or MMFS must
be uninstalled from the active CallPilot server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
238 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

This section includes the procedure for uninstalling PEPs.

Uninstalling PEPs

Step Action
In this procedure, CP1 is the active server and CP2 is the standby server.
This process causes the servers to go out of service while the PEPs are
uninstalled.

1 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Stop monitoring for CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2]
resource groups.
For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers (stop
monitoring)" (page 218).
c. Take CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] resource
groups offline (shut down CallPilot). For more information, see
"Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).
d. Wait for all resource groups to go offline.
e. Attach the mirror drives (drive E and drive F) to CP1 so that the
disks can be accessed from CP1.
Note: Attaching and detaching drives can take a few minutes.

• In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >

Data Sources.
• Right-click the drive you want to connect.
• Select Attach Data Source.

f. Uninstall the PEPs.

Note: The PEP code is enhanced so that it starts any CallPilot
services that it needs to have running (for example, the
database).

g. Detach the data source.

• In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain]
> Data Sources.
• Right-click the drive/data source.
• Select Detach Data Source.

h. Restart the server (if required).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 239

Result: CP1 now does not have the software, registry settings,
and database updates. Because the resource group is offline and
monitoring is disabled, CallPilot does not automatically restart after
the restart.

2 On CP2, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Attach the mirror drives (drive E and drive F) to CP2 so the disks
can be accessed from CP2.
Note: Attaching and detaching drives can take a few
minutes.
• In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain]
> Data Sources.
• Right-click the drive you want to connect.
• Select Attach Data Source.

c. Uninstall the PEPs.

Note: The PEP code is enhanced so that it starts any CallPilot
services that it needs to have running (for example, the
database).

d. Restart the server (if required).

Result:CP2 now does not have the software, registry settings,
and database updates. Because the resource group is offline
and monitoring is disabled, CallPilot does not automatically
restart after the restart.

3 On CP1, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Start monitoring for CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2]
resource groups to enable automatic failovers. For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).
c. Bring CallPilot, CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] resource
groups online (start up CallPilot). For more information, see
"Bringing the CallPilot resource group online" (page 214).
Result:PEPs are uninstalled from both the servers.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
240 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Microsoft Hotfixes
Microsoft Hotfixes generally affect only the base operating system. Hotfixes
may or may not require a restart.
• If the hotfix does not require a restart, the hotfix can be installed in
parallel on the active and the standby CallPilot servers.
• If the hotfix does require a restart, the installation process requires a
failover, which temporarily takes the CallPilot server out of service.

Remote support
USB modem dial-in
CallPilot 5.0 High Availability systems support the PCAnywhere Remote
Modem-to-Modem dial-in connection without field assistance. CallPilot 5.0
High Availability systems do not support PCAnywhere Remote TCP/IP
because the Routing and Remote Access Services (RRAS) are stopped
and their Startup Type is set to Disabled and Manual.
The following diagram shows the remote support setup for High Availability
systems.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 241

Figure 136
Remote support setup for High Availability

You can dial directly into the active High Availability server (through the
USB modem) using PCAnywhere Remote Modem on the remote PC. The
PCAnywhere Host on the active High Availability server is launched and is
waiting for the incoming modem calls.
However, to dial into the standby High Availability server, you must use the
following procedure.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
242 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Dialing into the standby High Availability server

Step Action

1 Dial into the active High Availability server using PCAnywhere

Remote Modem.
2 Launch the AutoStart Console.

3 Select Domains > [AutoStart_Domain] > Utility Processes >

UnloadTSPOnStandbyServer.

4 Right-click UnloadTSPOnStandbyServer and then select Start

Utility Process from the shortcut menu.

5 Select the host name of the standby High Availability server.

This utility does the following on the standby High Availability server:
• unloads the TSP
• stops the PCAnywhere Host
• starts the telephony server (TAPI)
• restarts the PCAnywhere Host

6 Wait approximately 5 minutes for the script to complete running on

the standby High Availability server.

7 Dial into the standby High Availability server using the PCAnywhere
Remote Modem.

8 After the dial-in session finishes, the server must be restarted so

that the Standby HA server is clean and ready to accept the coming
failover.

—End—

If you have to connect or reconnect the USB modem to the active High
Availability server after the High Availability system is running (that is,
CallPilot is in service [the CallPilot resource group is online]), you must
follow one of the following methods to make the PCAnywhere Host launch
properly:
Method 1:
1. Take the CallPilot resource group offline. For more information, see
"Taking the CallPilot resource group offline" (page 216).
2. Connect the USB modem.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 243

3. Bring the CallPilot resource group online. For more information, see
"Bringing the CallPilot resource group online" (page 214).
4. Using Windows Device Manger, right click Modems and then select
Scan for hardware changes.

Method 2:
1. Manually trigger a failover by shutting down the server. For more
information, see "Initiating a manual failover" (page 220).
2. Using Windows Device Manger, right click Modems and then select
Scan for hardware changes.

Remote Access tools

The following tools can be used to access the servers in the CallPilot 5.0
High Availability system:
• WebEx (Customer assistance is required. An Internet Explorer browser
security setting must be changed.)
• VPN (Access permission is required.)
• Remote Desktop (Normally blocked by enterprise gateways. Nortel does
not recommend this tool to access the active High Availability server.)
• PCAnywhere (Normally blocked by enterprise gateways.)

Backup and restore

For the High Availability system, the backup device must be defined on both
the active and the standby servers. If the backup device is not defined and a
failover occurs, scheduled backups do not run on the standby server.
If you must remotely connect to CallPilot Manager to perform a backup,
Nortel recommends that you use the Managed CLAN host name or the
Managed CLAN IP address to connect to a server in the High Availability
pair.
On a CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system, use the following procedures to:
• create a backup device
• schedule an archive backup
• perform a full system backup

Note: The following procedure is not required if you must create a

full-system backup to a tape on a CallPilot 5.0 High Availability system.
Backing up to tape requires that a tape drive must be physically attached
to each High Availability server to ensure that scheduled backups can
run after a failover.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
244 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Creating a backup device (network disk)

Step Action
For this procedure, CP1 is the active server and CP2 is the standby server.

1 Ensure that the dongle is on CP1 (which is the active server of the
High Availability pair).
2 On CP1, log on to CallPilot Manager.

3 Select System > Backup/Restore.

Result: The Backup/Restore window appears.
4 From the Select a task drop-down list, select Maintain and
configure backup devices.

5 Under Backup Devices, click Add Device.

Result: The Backup Device window appears.

6 On the Backup Device window, do the following:

a. Enter a unique Device Name.
b. Enter the Path to the backup device.
c. Verify that the Type field is set to Disk.
d. Under the Connect to network folder as area, enter the User
name and User Password. Then reenter the password in the
Confirm Password field.
This is user name and password to access the path/folder where
the backup is located.
e. Click Save.
Result:The <Device Name>.dev file is created in the
D:\Nortel\Data\backup\Devices folder.

7 On CP1 (the active server), navigate to folder D:\Nor-

tel\Data\backup.

8 Right-click the Devices folder and select Sharing and Security.

Result: The Devices Properties window opens.
9 Select the Sharing tab.

10 Select the Share this folder option.

11 Click Permissions.
Result: The Permission for Devices window opens.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 245

12 Enter a Share name for the shared folder.

Write down the name of this shared folder as it is used in a later step.

13 Under Groups or User Names, select Everyone.

14 Under Permissions for Everyone, select the Allow check box for
the Read row.

15 Click OK.
Result: The Permission for Devices window closes and the
Properties window for the Devices folder appears.

16 Click OK.
Result: The Devices Properties window closes.
17 On CP2 (the standby server), right-click My Computer and select
Map Network Drive.
Result: The Map Network Drive window opens.

18 Select an available Drive letter.

19 In the Folder field, map the shared folder (D:\Nortel\Data\backup\De-

vices) on CP1 by entering the following:
\\<Computer name of CP1>\<Share name of D:\Nor-
tel\Data\backup\Devices on CP1>
20 Click OK.

21 On CP2, from the mapped drive that was just created, copy
the new <Device Name>.dev file you just created on CP1 to
D:\Nortel\Data\backup\Devices folder on CP2 (the standby server).
22 On CP2 (the standby server), right-click My Computer and select
Disconnect Network Drive.
Result: The Disconnect Network Drives window opens.
23 Select mapped network drive and click OK.

—End—

Use the following procedure to create a scheduled archive backup.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
246 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Scheduling an archive backup

Step Action

1 Ensure that a backup device exists. For more information, see

"Creating a backup device (network disk)" (page 244).
2 On CP1, log on to CallPilot Manager.

3 Select System > Backup/Restore.

Result: The Backup/Restore window appears.

4 From the Select a task drop-down list, select Review and schedule
backup.

5 Under Scheduled Backups, click Add Backup.

Result: The Add New Backup Schedule window appears.

6 From the Backup Type drop-down list, select the type of archive
backup.
7 Under Device Name, select the backup device.

8 If applicable, select the Additional Options.

9 Click Next.

10 Select the backup frequency.

11 Select the Month, Date and Time for the scheduled backup.

12 Enter a Description for the backup.

13 Click Next.
Result: The Confirm Backup Schedule window appears.

14 Click Finish.
Result: The Backup/Restore window appears and shows the newly
scheduled backup under Scheduled Backups.
15 On CP1 (the active server), navigate to folder D:\Nor-
tel\Data\backup.

16 Right-click the Definitions folder and select Sharing and Security.

Result: The Definitions Properties window opens.

17 Select the Sharing tab.

18 Select the Share this folder option.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 247

19 Click Permissions.
Result: The Permission for Definitions window opens.

20 Enter a Share name for the shared folder.

Write down the name of this shared folder as it is used in a later step.

21 Under Groups or User Names, select Everyone.

22 Under Permissions for Everyone, select the Allow check box for
the Read row.

23 Click OK.
Result: The Permission for Definitions window closes and the
Properties window for the Definitions folder appears.
24 Click OK.
Result: The Definitions Properties window closes.

25 On CP2 (the standby server), right-click My Computer and select

Map Network Drive.
Result: The Map Network Drive window opens.

26 Select an available Drive letter.

27 In the Folder field, map the shared folder (D:\Nortel\Data\backup\Def-
initions) on CP1 by entering the following:
\\<Computer name of CP1>\<Share name of D:\Nor-
tel\Data\backup\Definitions on CP1>

28 Click OK.

29 On CP2, from the mapped drive that was just created, copy
the new <backup_options>.bsp files you just created on CP1 to
D:\Nortel\Data\backup\Definitions folder on CP2 (the standby
server).
The .bsp files created depend on the type of backup that you
selected.

30 On CP2 (the standby server), right-click My Computer and select

Disconnect Network Drive.
Result: The Disconnect Network Drives window opens.
31 Select mapped network drive and click OK.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
248 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Use the following procedure to perform a full system backup on the active
High Availability server. This single backup is used to restore both High
Availability servers. For more information on restoring, see "Restoring the
High Availability system" (page 249).

ATTENTION
If your system is backed up to tape, the backup is saved only on the tape drive
for the active High Availability server. Since both High Availability servers have
physical tape drives attached, you must track which server was active when the
backup occurred. When you perform the restore from tape, this ensures that
you are using the most current backup.

Performing a full system backup of the High Availability system

Step Action
CP1 is the active is the active server and CP2 is the standby server.

1 Ensure that a backup device exists for CP1 and CP2. For more
information, see "Creating a backup device (network disk)" (page
244).

2 On CP1, log on to CallPilot Manager.

3 Select System > Backup/Restore.
Result: The Backup/Restore window appears.

4 From the Select a task drop-down list, select Review and schedule
backup.

5 Under Scheduled Backups, click Add Backup.

Result: The Add New Backup Schedule window appears.
6 From the Backup Type drop-down list, select Full System Backup.

7 Under Device Name, select the backup device for CP1.

8 If applicable, select the Additional Options.

9 Click Next.

10 Under Select the backup frequency, select how often you want
the backup to occur.
11 Select the current Month, Date and Time for the full system backup.

12 Enter a Description for the backup.

13 Click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 249

Result: The Confirm Backup Schedule window appears.

14 Click Finish.
Result: The Backup/Restore window appears and shows the newly
scheduled backup for CP1 under Scheduled Backups.
15 If you want to perform the backup immediately, complete the following
steps. Otherwise, the backup occurs at the scheduled date and time.
a. Select the check box adjacent to the name of the backup.
b. Click Backup Now.
Result: A message appears asking you to start the backup.
c. Click OK to start the full system backup.

—End—

Restoring the High Availability system

If your High Availability system fails due to database corruption or an
unforeseen disaster (causing both CP1 and CP2 to be unavailable), you
must use the following guidelines to restore your system:
• If the existing CP1 and CP2 servers are being reused, then load the
CallPilot 1005r or 1006r image onto each server. For more information,
see the Software Administration and Maintenance Guide (NN44200-600)
for information on recovering system software.
• If you are replacing the CP1 and CP2 servers with new servers, see the
1005r Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or 1006r Server
Hardware Installation (NN44200-320). The new server comes with the
appropriate CallPilot image preinstalled from the factory.
• If database corruption occurs, you must reimage both High Availability
servers and then restore the two servers from a full system backup.

The following task list provides a high-level overview of restoring the High
Availability system:
1. Run the Setup Wizard on CP1 and CP2.
• On CP1, when prompted to perform a restore, select the full system
backup.
• On CP2, when prompted to perform a restore, select the full system
backup.

2. Run the Configuration Wizard on CP1 and CP2. If required, update the
switch information (such as TNs and CDNs).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
250 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

3. Connect and verify the LAN connections.

4. Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard to check the
configuration of CP1 and CP2.
5. Install the AutoStart software on CP1.
6. Install the AutoStart 5.2.2 on CP1.
7. Install the AutoStart software on CP2.
8. Configure licensing and security on CP1.
9. Install the AutoStart 5.2.2 software on CP2.
10. Configure the AutoStart software.
11. Bring the Resource Groups online.
12. Test your configuration.
13. Create the CallPilot Reporter connections.
14. Add server to a Windows domain (if required).

Reimage or replace a server in the High Availability pair

Use the following procedure to reimage a server or to replace a server
in the High Availability pair.

ATTENTION
For the purpose of the following procedure, the servers from High Availability pair
are referred to as existing server and replacement server. Where existing server
is used, it refers to the server in the HA pair which is in service and is not being
replaced. Where replacement server is used, it refers to the new server which
is replacing a failed server in the pair.

WARNING
The server that is reimaged or replaced must maintain the same
TCP/IP networking information (such as IP addresses and local
host name) in order for the High Availability pair to operate
correctly.
When the reimaged or replaced server is running, you can change
the local host name, local ELAN/CLAN parameters (such as IP
address and host name), or HB1/HB2/Mirror parameters (such
as IP addresses).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 251

Reimaging or replacing one of the High Availability servers

Step Action

1 Use the AutoStart Console on the existing server to disable

monitoring. For more information, see "Disabling automatic failovers
(stop monitoring)" (page 218).

2 Disconnect the network cables from the failed server (the server to
be reimaged or replaced).

3 If the failed server is being reused, load the appropriate CallPilot

image onto the server. For more information, see the Software
Administration and Maintenance Guide (NN44200-600) for
information on recovering system software.
If you are replacing the failed server with a new server, see either
the 1005r Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-308) or the 1006r
Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-320). A new server comes
with the matching CallPilot image preinstalled from the factory.
4 Install the antivirus software on the replacement server if necessary.
Note: For more information about the antivirus software
packages that have been approved by Nortel for CallPilot,
see the P-2007-0101-Global : CallPilot Support for Anti-Virus
Applications bulletin.

5 On the replacement server, run the Setup Wizard and apply any
CallPilot PEPs and SUs.
SUs and PEPs are found in the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library
(ESPL) at www.nortel.com/espl.

6 Log on to CallPilot Manager on the replacement server.

7 On the replacement server, run the Configuration Wizard to configure
the server. For more information, see "Configuring the replacement
server using the Configuration Wizard" (page 294).

8 Restart the replacement server.

9 Connect all the network cables to the replacement server. For more
information, see "Connecting and verifying LAN connections" (page
76).

10 On the replacement server, install the AutoStart Agent and Console

software (including any required patches) by entering the node
name of the existing server. Follow the steps in "Install the AutoStart
software on CP1" (page 86) .

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
252 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Note: You must enter the local host name of the existing
CallPilot server when installing the AutoStart software.

ATTENTION
The following step takes your CallPilot High Availability system offline.
Your CallPilot system will not process calls.

11 Take the CallPilot resource group offline on the existing server. For
more information, see "Taking the CallPilot resource group offline"
(page 216).

12 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to select Resource

Groups > CallPilot and then expand the CallPilot resource group.
Figure 137
Resource group: Settings tab

a. Click the Settings tab.

b. Under theStartup Sequence, do the following:
i. Select drive E (drvE) and then click Delete.
ii. Select drive F (drvF) and then click Delete.
c. Click Apply.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 253

13 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to expand Data

Sources.
a. Right-click the drvE Data Resource and then click the Delete
Current Data Source option to delete drive E.
b. Right-click the drvF Data Resource and then click the Delete
Current Data Source option to delete drive F.
Figure 138
Delete Current Data Source

14 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to select the first
node (expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > existing server) and
do the following:
a. Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.
b. Under Configure Mirror Settings, change the Remote Mirror
Host value to None.
c. Click Apply.
15 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to select the
second node (expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > replacement
server) and do the following:
a. Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
254 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

b. Under Configure Mirror Settings, change the Remote Mirror

Host value to None.
c. Click Apply.

16 Restart both servers.

17 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to select the first
node (expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > existing server) and
do the following:
a. Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.
b. Under Configure Mirror Settings, change the Remote Mirror
Host value to the hostname of replacement server.
c. Click Apply.

18 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to select the

second node (expand [AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes > CP2) and do
the following:
a. Select the Failure Detection and Mirroring tab.
b. Under Configure Mirror Settings, change the Remote Mirror
Host value to the hostname of existing server.
c. Click Apply.
19 On the existing server, recreate drive E (drvE) and drive F (drvF) and
select the existing server as the source node:
a. Right-click Data Sources on AutoStart Console.
b. Select Create New Data Source > EMC Mirroring for
Windows.
Result: The New EMC Mirroring for Windows Data Source
appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 255

Figure 139
Create New Data Source - EMC Mirroring for Windows

c. In the New EMC Mirroring for Windows Data Source window, do

the following:
i. Under the Description area, enter the Data Source Name -
drvE and Description - drive E.
ii. Under the Drive Selection area, select hostname of existing
server from the Source Node drop-down list and drive E
from the Source Drive drop-down list.
iii. Under the Drive Selection area, also select the hostname of
replacement server from the Target Node drop-down list
and drive E from the Target Drive drop-down list.
iv. Click Apply.
v. Click Yes to dismiss the warning message.
d. Right-click Data Sources on AutoStart Console.
e. Select Create New Data Source > EMC Mirroring for
Windows. Result: The New EMC Mirroring for Windows Data
Source appears.
f. In the New EMC Mirroring for Windows Data Source window, do
the following:
i. Under the Description area, enter theData Source Name -
drvF and Description - drive F.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
256 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

ii. Under the Drive Selection area, select the hostname of

existing server from the Source Node drop-down list and
drive F from the Source Drive drop-down list.
iii. Under the Drive Selection area, also select the hostname
of replacement server from the Target Node drop-down list
and drive F from the Target Drive drop-down list.
iv. Click Apply.
v. Click Yes to dismiss the warning message.

20 Select Resource Groups > CallPilot.

21 Select the Settings tab.

22 Under the Startup and Shutdown Sequences area, select Data

Source from the drop-down list which adjacent to the Add button.

23 Click Add.
Result: The Data Source Properties window appears.
Figure 140
Data Source Properties

24 From the Name drop-down list, select drvE and leave all other fields
with the default selections.

25 Click Apply.

26 Under the Startup and Shutdown Sequences area, select Data

Source from the drop-down list which adjacent to the Add button.

27 Click Add.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 257

Result: The Data Source Properties window appears.

28 From the Name drop-down list, select drvF and leave all other fields
with the default selections.

29 Click Apply.

30 Click Apply (on the Settings tab).

31 Under the Startup and Shutdown Sequences area, do the

following:
a. Under Startup Sequence, use the Up arrow to move drvE and
drvF to the top of the Startup Sequence list.
b. Under Shutdown Sequence, use the Down arrow to move drvE
and drvF to the bottom of the Shutdown Sequence list.

32 Click Apply.

33 Attach drive E and drive F to the existing server. Perform the

following for both drives:
a. In the AutoStart Console, select the [AutoStart_Domain] >
Data Sources.
b. Right-click the drive you want to connect.
c. Select Attach Data Source.
Result: The data sources (drive E and drive F) are in the warning
state and their icons are yellow.
Note: A message is displayed informing you that the data source
is being mirrored and the status of data source is updated to
show the progress of synchronization. It can take between 30
minutes to 2 hours for the data sources to be mirrored between
the two servers.

34 Wait while the data sources are mirrored and have Attached status.
35 Detach drive E and drive F. Perform the following for both drives:
a. In the AutoStart Console, select [AutoStart_Domain] > Data
Sources.
b. Right-click the drive you want to detach.
c. Select Detach Data Source.
Result: Data Sources are detached.

36 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to bring the

CallPilot resource group online (if they are not already online). For

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
258 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

more information, see "Bringing the CallPilot Resource Group online

on CP1" (page 119).

37 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to bring

the remaining resource groups online (if they are not already
online). For more information, see "Bringing the Resource Groups
CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] online" (page 122).
38 On the existing server, use the AutoStart Console to enable
AutoStart monitoring. For more information, see "Enabling automatic
failovers (start monitoring)" (page 219).

39 If you have scheduled backups configured, do the following:

a. On the replacement server, browse to the shared
D:\Nortel\Data\backup\Devices folder of the existing server and
copy the contents of the Devices folder.
b. On the replacement server, paste the contents in to the Devices
folder on the replacement server.
c. On the replacement server, browse to the shared
D:\Nortel\Data\backup\Definitions folder of the existing server
and copy the contents of the Definitions folder.
d. On the replacement server, paste the contents in to the
Definitions folder on the replacement server.

—End—

Installing the AutoStart software on the replacement server

The following procedure installs AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Agent and Console
software on the replacement server. This procedure takes approximately
10 minutes.

ATTENTION
The computer name must be set before you Install the AutoStart software. The
software requires the computer name. The computer name must contain only
alphanumeric characters. Non-alphanumeric characters (such as a hyphen [-])
are not supported.
If you want to change the computer name after installing the server you must
uninstall and then reinstall the AutoStart software.

Installing the AutoStart software on the replacement server

Step Action

1 Insert the CallPilot Application CD.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 259

2 Navigate to the Z:\EMC folder on the CallPilot Application CD.

3 Double-click the EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update.exe to unpack

the archive to the D:\temp folder.
Result: These files are unpacked into the D:\temp\EMC_Au-
toStart_5.3_SP3_Update folder: EAS53_WIN_x86.exe
EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe EMC AutoStart Update Process.pdf.

4 Double-click the EAS53SP3_WIN_x86.exe file to start the

installation.
Result: InstallShield Wizard informs you that AutoStart 5.3 SP3
software is preparing to install (install preparation can take a few
minutes). After preparation is complete, Welcome window Appears.
Figure 141
InstallShield Wizard - Preparing to install AutoStart 5.3 SP3 software

Figure 142
Welcome window

5 Click Next.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
260 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder to read the documents appears.

Figure 143
Reminder to read the documents

6 Click Yes, I have read the documents.

Result: AutoStart 5.3 SP3 reminder is closed.

7 Click Next on the Welcome window.

Result: The License Agreement window appears.
Figure 144
License Agreement window

8 Select the I accept the terms in the license agreement option.

9 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Setup window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 261

Figure 145
Custom Setup window

10 Click Change to change the instalation path.

Result: The Change Current Destination Folder dialog box appears.
Figure 146
Change Current Destination Folder dialog box

11 In the Folder name field, change the drive letter from C to D, change
the path to D:\Programs Files\EMC AutoStart.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
262 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

ATTENTION
You must install the software in the D:\Program Files\EMC AutoStart
directory or the software does not work correctly.

12 Click OK.
Result: Change Current Destination Folder dialog box closes and
you are returned to Custom Setup window, which shows the correvt
installation path.

13 Click Next.
Result: The Agent Connection Information window appears.
Figure 147
Agent Connection Informaiton window

14 Select No, there is an existing node in the domain option button.

Result: The field Primary Node Name is highlighted.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 263

Figure 148
Agent Connection Information window - There is an existing node
in the domain

15 Enter the host name of the existing server in Primary Node Name
field.
Note: "Retrieve Configuration Now" button can be pressed to
see if Primary Node is accessible.
If a primary node is accessible, Domain Name field will be filled
automatically. Two next steps (16, 17) can be skipped.
If a primary node is not accessible for some reason, the following
error message appears:

Figure 149
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 warning message

Press OK to close the warning message; resolve the issue and

proceed with the AutoStart 5.3 SP3 installation.

16 Enter the EMC AutoStart Domain Name. The AutoStart Domain

Name must be the same name that you entered in the High
Availability Configuration Wizard.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
264 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

Note: This document uses [AutoStart_Domain]. This value must

be replaced with your AutoStart domain name.

17 Leave the Initial Port Number unchanged.

18 Click Next.
Result: The Mirroring Network Configuring and Product Licensing
window appears. The list of licenses is disabled.
Figure 150
Mirroring Network Configuration and Product Licensing window

Note: If you enter an invalid Primary Node Name, or the

AutoStart Agent is not running on the specified node, an error
message is displayed (similar to the following). Confirm that the
Primary Node Name is correct and that the network is configured
so that the name can be resolved on another node. Click OK to
return to the Agent Connection Information window.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 265

Figure 151
Error: Invalid name or agent not running on Primary node

Note: If the administrator account of the replacement server

does not exist in the AutoStart domain, the following error
is displayed. Click OK to return to the Agent Connection
Information window.
Configure licensing and security on the existing server according
to the chapter "Add the node 2 administrator account to the
AutoStart Console on node 1 " (page 94).

Figure 152
Primary Agent error

19 In the field Mirroring IP Address, select the IP address that was

assigned to the Mirror NIC on the replacement server. The default
value is Configure Later.

20 Click Next to continue.

Result: Confirm Settings window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
266 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

21 Verify that the settings are correct.

22 Click Install to start the installation of the AutoStart Agent and

Console software.
Result: the Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window appears and shows
the status of installation.
Figure 153
Installing AutoStart 5.3 SP3 window

23 Wait until the installation is complete and InstallShield Wizard

Completed window appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Support 267

Figure 154
InstallShield Wizard Completed window

24 Click Finish.
Result: The AutoStart 5.3 SP3 Installer Information dialog box
appears.
Figure 155
AutoStart 5.3 SP3 dialog box

25 Click No if there are patches to install or click Yes to restart the

replacement server.
Note: If there are any patches available for AutoStart 5.3 SP3
software, install the patches and then restart the replacement
server.

26 Delete the directory EMC_AutoStart_5.3_SP3_Update from

D:\temp.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
268 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

RAID splitting for HA systems

ATTENTION
Verifying consistency on the drives step must be performed on both nodes before
any operations with RAID. See either 1005r Server Maintenance and Diagnostics
(NN44200-704) or 1006r Server Maintenance and Diagnostics (NN44200-709)
for details.

To perform any maintenance procedure

Step Action

1 Split the RAID as described in "Splitting the RAID on a 1005r server"

(page 268).

2 Perform intended maintenance actions.

3 Perform synchronization of the RAID if no error or abnormal issues
were encountered as described in "Synchronize the RAID on a 1005r
server after a successful maintenance procedure" (page 270)or
return the system back to it’s original configuration if something has
gone wrong as described in "Synchronize the RAID on a 1006r
server after an unsuccessful maintenance procedure" (page 270).

—End—

Splitting the RAID on a 1005r server

Ensure that your system is in full working order and the RAID hardware
configuration is set up properly. See 1005r Server Maintenance and
Diagnostics (NN44200-704) for details.

ATTENTION
As an added precaution, Nortel recommends that you perform a full system
backup prior to performing a RAID-split. For more information about system
backups, see the CallPilot Manager online Help.

Split the RAID on a 1005r server

Step Action

1 On the active CP server, do the following:

a. Launch the AutoStart Console
b. Stop monitoring. For more information, see "Disabling automatic
failovers (stop monitoring)" (page 218)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 RAID splitting for HA systems 269

c. Take the resource group CallPilot offline (shutting down CallPilot).

For more information, see "Taking the CallPilot resource group
offline" (page 216)
d. Wait for the resource group CallPilot to go offline

2 On the active CP server, load the MegaRAID console. Select Start

> Programs > PowerConsole Plus > MegaRAID client

3 Ensure that Access Mode > Full Access is selected.

4 Click OK. The MegaRAID Power Console Plus window appears.

5 Ensure all drives are in ONLINE state (marked green).

6 In the Physical Devices section, right-click the second drive. The

drives are displayed as follows: (0)A1-1-Onln (1)A1-2-Onln
7 Select Tools>Fail Drive from the shortcut menu. A message
appears advising that marking the online drive Failed results in
changes.

8 Ignore the warning and click OK. The drive status changes to FAILED
and the color of the icon changes to red (for example, A01-2-Failed).
At this point, the RAID is split, and the backup drive marked as
FAILED is no longer written to. See Figure 156 "RAID split" (page
269).
Figure 156
RAID split

9 Perform steps 2-8 on standby CP server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
270 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

—End—

Synchronize the RAID on a 1005r server after a successful

maintenance procedure
Step Action

1 On the active CP server (without shutting down the server), from

Windows, click Start > Programs > Power Console Plus >
MegaRAID client.
Note: Ensure that Access Mode > Full Access is selected.

2 Click OK. The MegaRAID Power Console Plus window appears.

3 In the Physical Devices section, right-click the hard disk drive that
is marked FAILED. Example: A01-2-Failed.

ATTENTION
Do not make the failed drive online at this point, or data corruption can
occur. If you failed the wrong drive by mistake, you must select rebuild to
bring it back into service.

4 From the right mouse shortcut menu, select Rebuild. When the
rebuild is complete, the drive status changes to ONLINE and the
icon colour changes to green.

5 Repeat steps 1-4 on standby CP server.

—End—

ATTENTION
This process can take up to 6 hours. If the server reboots during the rebuild
process, the rebuild continues when the server restarts. However, a power down
or reboot is not recommended during the rebuild process.

Synchronize the RAID on a 1006r server after an unsuccessful

maintenance procedure
Step Action

1 Power down one of the CP servers.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 RAID splitting for HA systems 271

ATTENTION
Do not use the Power Console for the following procedure, or data
corruption can occur.

2 Restart the other CP server and enter the Ctrl+M utility when
prompted during system bootup.

3 From the Management menu, select Objects and press Enter.

4 Select Objects > Physical Drive and press Enter.

5 Select FAIL Drive for the drive that is online (A01-1-Onln). The drive
is displayed as failed.
6 Select the second drive (previously taken offline as the backup
drive and marked failed) and make it ONLINE. Ignore the warning
message. The second drive is now marked ONLINE and the first
drive is marked failed.

7 Exit the utility and press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the server.

The system boots up to the original configuration before the PEP
installation.
8 On the CP Server, perform the following steps:
a. Launch the AutoStart Console.
b. Start monitoring (to enable automatic failovers). For more
information, see "Enabling automatic failovers (start monitoring)"
(page 219).
c. Bring the resource group online (starting up CallPilot). For more
information, see "Bringing the CallPilot resource group online"
(page 214).
d. Test call processing functionality after the CP server boots into
service.
9 Repeat steps 2-7 on the offline CP server.

10 Once both servers are confirmed to be online, open the Windows

MegaRAID console and rebuild the failed drive using the same
process described in "Synchronize the RAID on a 1005r server after
a successful maintenance procedure" (page 270). The system is
now back to it’s original configuration.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
272 Chapter 6 Maintaining a High Availability system

CallPilot Manager, Channel Monitor

The status of channels in Channel Monitor is specific to each CallPilot node
in a High Availability pair, and is not synchronized between the nodes. In
addition, the status is saved to each node’s independent data, which can
create unexpected conditions during Resource Group operations, such
as bringing the CallPilot Resource Group online, relocating the CallPilot
Resource Group (manual failover), and after system defined automatic
failovers.

For example, if all channels are stopped on the active CallPilot node during
a maintenance activity, such as during a Feature Expansion procedure, the
channel status is saved to the node’s independent data (not synchronized
between nodes).

When the Resource Group is brought online or relocated via a failover to a

CallPilot node, the channels will be enabled or disabled depending on the
information in the node’s independent data, which was saved from the last
status change when the node was in service. Channels can be enabled
through Channel Monitor in CallPilot Manager if necessary. The status
change (enabled) will be saved to the node’s independent data.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 273

Chapter 7
Upgrades, migrations, and feature
expansion
In this chapter
"Introduction" (page 273)

"Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing

CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r " (page 277)

Introduction
For the High Availability feature, there are minimal differences between the
upgrade and platform migration procedures and the new system installation
procedure. The main differences are:
• You must restore data from a backup as part of the upgrade or platform
migration.
• You must restore data on both of the servers in the pair when performing
the upgrade. Restoring the data is required to ensure that all of the
registry settings in the backup (for example, the LDAP search base)
are restored correctly.
• You must modify and add settings in Configuration Wizard (for example,
NIC card settings).

Scenario 1: If you are upgrading or migrating to a CallPilot 5.0 1005r or

1006r server and are adding the High Availability feature, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions in CallPilot Upgrade and Platform Migration
Guide (NN44200-400) to upgrade or migrate your server to a CallPilot
1005r or 1006r server running CallPilot 5.0.
Note: Do not enable the High Availability feature when running the
Configuration Wizard.

2. Follow the instructions outlined in "Feature Expansion: Adding the High

Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r " (page

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
274 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

277) to introduce a second 1005r or 1006r server and to configure the

two servers as a High Availability pair.

Scenario 2: If you have a CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r server and are adding
the High Availability feature, follow the instructions outlined in "Feature
Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0
1005r or 1006r " (page 277) to introduce a second server and configure the
two identical servers as a High Availability pair.

After you make any changes to a High Availability configuration, the changes
must be transparent to the end users, including any existing CallPilot
Reporter, CallPilot Manager, Desktop, My CallPilot and Application Builder
installations, as well as the switch. To ensure this transparency, the ELAN
IP address, CLAN IP address, and host name used by the original CallPilot
server must be used as the new Managed (virtual) IP address for the pair
of High Availability servers. Because the Managed IP addresses and host
name are visible to the outside world, by reusing the current IP addresses
and host name, the changes to the server configuration are invisible to the
applications. New ELAN IP address, CLAN IP address, and host names are
required for both the original CallPilot server and the new CallPilot server.
All IP address and host name changes must be made before you import the
AutoStart definition file in order for the software to work correctly.

If you have an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r server (running in a

non-High Availability configuration) you can perform a feature expansion to
include the High Availability feature. No additional hardware is required to
add the High Availability feature to a 1005r or 1006r server, as all of the
required hardware comes preinstalled from the factory.

Note: Application Builder is a graphical program that you use to

create CallPilot applications that callers access as dialable services.
Application Builder is installed on a customer provided PC. In the past
(non-HA configuration) we have been able to access Application Builder
over a remote TCP/IP connection utilizing RRAS. In the HA environment
each 1005r or 1006r server requires its own unique host name, ELAN
IP address, and CLAN IP address. In addition, the pair of servers are
assigned a Managed (or virtual) host name, Managed ELAN IP address,
and Managed CLAN IP address to make the pair of servers look like a
single CallPilot server to the end clients. This new architecture does not
make it possible to access application builder over a TCP/IP connection.

The procedure is the same as the new system installation procedure

documented in Chapter 5 "Install and configure the High Availability pair"
(page 41), with the following exception.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Guidelines 275

ATTENTION
Before installing the AutoStart software on the existing server, new IP addresses
(CLAN and ELAN) and a new host name must be assigned to the existing
CallPilot 1005r or 1006r server.
Providing a new host name and IP addresses is required to reuse the existing
host name and IP addresses as the Managed host name and IP addresses. As
a result, any existing users or applications can continue to access the 1005r or
1006r server without requiring configuration changes.

Guidelines
This section provides a basic overview of the tasks required to perform
an upgrade or migration. Read this list and then proceed to the CallPilot
Upgrade and Platform Migration Guide (NN44200-400) for detailed
procedures.
1. On your current system (pre-release 5.0) take note of all networking
information: host name, CLAN IP address, ELAN IP address, installed
PEPs/SU, and installed languages.
The networking information (host name and IP addresses) is required
when entering in the Managed CLAN host name, Managed CLAN IP
address, and Managed ELAN IP. (Estimated time: 10 minutes)
2. Install the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard on the pre-release 5.0 system,
which will be upgraded or migrated. (Estimated time: 15 minutes)
3. Run the CallPilot Upgrade Wizard.
During the Upgrade Wizard you are asked to perform a full backup. If a
backup is done to disk (that is, backed up to a network location), then it
is possible to restore both CP1 and CP2 at the same time, which saves
time to be in service. (Estimated time: 40 to 160 minutes depending on
system and database size)
4. Upgrade only—Once the Upgrade Wizard is completed and a full back
up is performed, install the CallPilot 1005r or 1006r Release 5 image
on CP1. The second 1005r (CP2) comes preinstalled with Release 5.0
from the factory. Log on to the CP1 and CP2 servers using the default
login user name and password (administrator / Bvw250). (Estimated
time: 40 minutes)
Migration and Upgrade—The CallPilot 1005r or 1006r Release 5.0
image comes preinstalled at factory. Log on to both CP1 and CP2
system using default login user name and password (administrator /
Bvw250) (Estimated time: 0 minutes)
5. On both CallPilot servers (CP1 and CP2), configure new computer
names and IP addresses for the CLAN. The computer names and IP
addresses are new as the current CLAN host names and IP addresses

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
276 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

are reused as the Managed CLAN host name and IP address for the
High Availability pair. Otherwise, proceed to next step. (This would be
required in order to perform a system restore from disk [network drive]).
(Estimated time: 10 minutes)
6. Run the CallPilot Setup Wizard on CP1 and CP2. (Estimated time: 30
minutes per server; includes PEP installation)
7. When prompted to perform a restore, select Yes. Both CP1 and CP2
can be restored at the same time if you are restoring from a disk (that is,
a network location). Otherwise, CP1 must be completely restored before
CP2 can be restored. (Estimated time: 180 minutes per server)
8. Run the Configuration Wizard on CP1. Do not enable High Availability
during network configuration (ensure that the High Availability mode
check box is not selected). Restart CP1 when prompted. (Estimated
time: 40 minutes)
If you are performing the restore from tape, CP2 can begin the restore at
this point.
9. On CP1, you can begin testing to ensure voice services and channels
are properly working. (Estimated time: 120 minutes)
10. Run the Configuration Wizard on CP2. Do not enable High Availability
during network configuration (ensure that the High Availability mode
check box is not selected). Restart CP2 when prompted. (Estimated
time: 40 minutes)
11. If testing was satisfactory on CP1, run the Configuration Wizard again
on CP1 and enable the High Availability feature, add the new network
parameters, and restart when prompted. (Estimated time: 10 minutes)
Note: To do this, you can use the CallPilot Individual Feature
Configuration [Express Mode] and select Network Interface Card
Configuration check box.

12. Run the Configuration Wizard again on CP2 and enable the High
Availability feature, add the new network parameters, and restart when
prompted. (Estimated time: 10 minutes)
Note: To do this, you can use the CallPilot Individual Feature
Configuration [Express Mode] and select Network Interface Card
Configuration check box.

13. Run Stage 1 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard. For the
Managed CLAN host name, Managed CLAN IP address, and Managed
ELAN IP address, use the host name and IP addresses that you noted
in item 1 (that is, the host name and IP addresses from the pre-release
5.0 system). (Estimated time: 5 minutes)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 277

14. On CP1, install the EMC AutoStart software and add the administrator
account of CP2. (Estimated time: 15 minutes)
15. Install the EMC AutoStart software on CP2. (Estimated time: 10
minutes)
16. Configure the EMC AutoStart software on CP1. All the configuration is
done from CP1. (Estimated time: 30 minutes)
17. Run Stage 2 of the High Availability Configuration Wizard. (Estimated
time: 5 minutes)
18. Complete the EMC AutoStart configuration. (Estimated time: 5 minutes)
19. Bring the CallPilot resource group online. (Estimated time: 10 minutes)
20. Bring the CP1 and CP2 resource groups online. (Estimated time: 5
minutes)
21. Test the system. (Estimated time: 120 minutes)
22. Create the CallPilot Report connections. (Estimated time: 20 minutes)
23. If required, join the Windows domain. (Estimated time: 30 minutes)

Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an

existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r server
A CallPilot High Availability system consists of either two 1005r or two 1006r
servers that work as peers. At any time, one server is active while the other
server is in standby mode.
If you have a CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r server (running in a non-High
Availability configuration), a feature expansion can be performed to add the
High Availability feature to the server. However, a second 1005r or 1006r
server (running CallPilot 5.0 with the High Availability feature) is required to
complete the High Availability system.
Use the procedures in this section to do the following:
• Add a second 1005r or 1006r server running CallPilot 5.0 to an existing
1005r or 1006r server, respectively, running CallPilot 5.0.
• Configure the two servers as a High Availability pair.

For the purposes of this section, the servers are referred to as CallPilot
server 1 (CP1) and CallPilot server 2 (CP2) where:
• CP1 is the existing 1005r or 1006r server. (CP1 must be running
CallPilot 5.0 or must have been upgraded or migrated to run CallPilot
5.0.)
• CP2 is the new 1005r or 1006r server that is being added (a new server
that has CallPilot 5.0 installed from the factory).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
278 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

Feature expansion task list

The following table outlines the tasks and procedures that must be
completed to add the High Availability feature. Ensure that you complete
each task in the ordered presented.

Table 11
Task List: High Availability feature expansion
Task Estimated time Procedures
Prepare the switch 60 minutes See "Preparing the switch" (page 278)
Install the new 1005r or 210 minutes See "Installing the new 1005r server
1006r server (CP2) (CP2)" (page 279)
Record the current server 5 minutes See "Recording the current 1005r
configuration from CP1 or 1006r server configuration (CP1)"
(page 280)
Run the Upgrade Wizard on 160 minutes depending on See "Running the Upgrade Wizard on
the existing 1005r or 1006r system and database size CP1" (page 281)
server (CP1)
Prepare the new 1005r or 10 minutes See "Prepare the new 1005r or 1006r
1006r server (CP2) server (CP2)" (page 284)
Run the Setup Wizard on 210 minutes (includes See "Running the Setup Wizard on
the new 1005r or 1006r restore time) CP2" (page 286)
server (CP2)
Configure CP1 using the 40 minutes See "Configuring CP1 using the
CallPilot Configuration Configuration Wizard" (page 290)
Wizard
Configure CP2 using the 40 minutes See "Configuring the replacement
CallPilot Configuration server using the Configuration Wizard"
Wizard (page 294)
Complete the High 215 minutes See "Completing the High Availability
Availability feature feature configuration" (page 299)
configuration

Prepare the switch

The switch configuration must be completed before the High Availability
feature can be implemented.

Preparing the switch

Step Action

1 Configure the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 switch.

For detailed information, see the following:
• Meridian 1 and CallPilot Server Configuration (NN44200-302)

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 279

• Communication Server 1000 and CallPilot Server Configuration

(NN44200-312)

Note 1: Both High Availability servers must use the same

Control Directory Number (CDN).
Note 2: Server CP2 requires dedicated MGate cards in the
switch to function correctly. Both the number of MGate cards and
the switch configuration must be the same as for the existing
CallPilot server CP1.

2 Prepare the switch by adding additional MGate cards as required.

3 Program the switch as necessary.

—End—

Install the new 1005r or 1006r server (CP2)

A second server is required to complete the High Availability pair. The
following procedure assumes that this 1005r or 1006r server has come from
the factory with CallPilot 5.0 and the High Availability feature installed.

Installing the new 1005r server (CP2)

Step Action

1 Refer to the following documents to perform the steps outlined in

this procedure.
• 1005r Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-308). or 1006r
Server Hardware Installation (NN44200-320)
• Installation and Configuration Task List (NN44200-306)

2 Unpack the server.

3 Install CP2 in the same rack as CP1.

Ensure that the two servers are close enough so that they can be
connected by the crossover LAN cables for the HB1, HB2, and
MIRROR connections. The cables must be long enough to connect
the two servers.

ATTENTION
Do not connect the HB1, HB2, and MIRROR crossover LAN cables at
this time.

4 Connect the peripheral equipment to both servers.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
280 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

The peripheral equipment includes the monitor, keyboard, and

mouse.

5 Power on the CP2 server.

Result: The server starts and the Windows 2003 Mini-Setup runs.
During the Windows 2003 Mini-Setup, the server automatically
restarts twice.

—End—

Record the current 1005r or 1006r server configuration (CP1)

To ensure that end users can access the pair of High Availability servers
and that they do not require any changes to their systems, the following
information for the server (CP1) must be recorded and then reused as the
managed networking parameters:
• existing computer name
• ELAN IP address
• CLAN IP address
• installed PEPs and SUs
• installed languages

Recording the current 1005r or 1006r server configuration (CP1)

Step Action

1 Record the current computer name.

The computer name will be used as the Managed computer name of
the High Availability pair.

2 Record the current ELAN IP address.

The ELAN IP address will be used as the Managed ELAN IP address
of the High Availability pair.

3 Record the current CLAN IP address.

The CLAN IP address will be used as the Managed CLAN IP
address of the High Availability pair.
4 Record the IDs of any PEPs and SUs that are installed on the
current server.
The same PEPs and SUs must be installed on both servers in the
High Availability pair.
5 Record the languages that are installed on the current server.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 281

The same languages must be installed on both servers in the High

Availability pair.

—End—

Run the Upgrade Wizard on the existing server (CP1)

The Upgrade Wizard must be run on the existing 1005r or 1006r server
(CP1) to generate a backup that can be restored on the new 1005r or 1006r
server CP2.
For Scenario 1, you do not have to perform the following procedure because
a backup was created when you ran the Upgrade Wizard during your
upgrade or migration process.
For Scenario 2, you must complete the following procedure.

Running the Upgrade Wizard on CP1

Step Action

1 Launch the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard by clicking Start >

Programs > CallPilot > Upgrade Wizard.
Note: While the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard runs, all screen
information is written to the log file in the following folder:
D:\Nortel\Data\UpgradeWizard.log

Result: The CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard - Welcome screen

appears.

2 On the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard - Welcome screen, click Next.

Result: The Platform Validity Check screen appears, which lists
the software and hardware currently on the system, and evaluates
the status of each item.
3 Click Next to continue.
Result: The CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard checks your software
version.
4 Wait while the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard analyzes your platform.
Result: The Platform Validation screen appears.

5 Click Next.
Result: The Checking Computer Name screen appears.

6 Click Next.
Result: The Checking Free Disk Space screen appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
282 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

7 Click Next to determine if your data is valid and can be upgraded

to CallPilot 5.0.

8 Click Next to validate your data.

Result: The Performing Data Validity Check screen appears. A
process bar shows how much of the data has been validated.

9 Click Next.
Result: The Serial Number and Key Code screen appears.
You need your CallPilot 5.0 keycode, serial number, and image CDs
or DVDs to proceed.

10 Click Next to verify your CallPilot keycode.

Result: The Feature Verification - Success screen appears.
11 Check your installed features against the screen list.
If a feature is missing from your new keycode, contact your distributor
to obtain a new keycode.

12 Click Next to verify that your image CD or DVD matches your

CallPilot platform.
Result: The Validate Image Media screen appears.

13 Insert the CallPilot 5.0 Image CD or DVD into the CD or DVD drive,
enter Z:\ as the drive letter, and click Next.
14 Wait while the wizard checks that the inserted CD or DVD is valid for
your platform.
Note: If the CD or DVD is not valid, the wizard blocks the rest
of the upgrade process and you must contact your distributor
(channel partner) to obtain the correct CD or DVD.

Result: The Optional Language CD validation screen appears.

15 Select the Skip Language CD Validation option.

ATTENTION
You must use a CallPilot 5.0 Language CD when configuring a CallPilot
5.0 system. An earlier release (pre-5.0 Language CD) cannot be used.

16 Click Next.
Result: The Select Backup Medium screen appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 283

CAUTION
ANY MESSAGES RECEIVED AFTER BACKUP
BEGINS ARE LOST
The backup takes from 1 to 3 hours to complete and
consumes considerable CPU resources. Any messages
that come in while the backup is running are not included
in the backup. To avoid losing any user messages, Nortel
recommends that you courtesy down the system prior to
starting the backup.

17 Select the type of backup medium for your CallPilot data.

• If you choose to back up to tape:

ATTENTION
This process overwrites the existing data on the tape.

Insert the tape into the tape drive and click Next to start the
backup immediately. Proceed to the next step.
• If you choose to back up to disk:
Click Next to choose the backup device. The Full System Backup
- Select Backup Devices screen appears. Click List Devices.
Result: The screen displays the backup devices that are defined
on your CallPilot server.
— If no devices are listed, log on to CallPilot Manager and
define your backup devices (System > Backup/Restore
> Maintain and configure backup devices). Click List
Devices again. Select the backup device you want to use
and click Next to start the backup.
— If the list is populated, select the appropriate backup device
and click Next to start the backup.

18 When the Perform System Backup screen appears, click Start

Backup.
19 After the progress bar shows the percentage complete and displays
the status, do the following:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
284 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

IF THEN
errors occur • follow the displayed link and examine the log
file for errors.
• contact your distributor (channel partner) if
you need assistance to resolve the errors.
• click the Restart button to restart the backup
process.
no errors occur • click Next.

20 After the backup is complete, eject the tape from the tape drive (if
the data was backed up to a tape).

ATTENTION
Failure to remove the tape from the drive adds an hour or more to the
restore process.

21 Click Next.
22 Click Finish to close the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard.

23 Print or record the IP information in the file D:\Nortel\Data\IPCON-

FIGURATION.txt.
Note: You need the IP information if your backup is on a network
drive, or if you are downloading PEPs from the network prior
to the restore process. You also need this IP information to
configure your Embedded LAN (ELAN) subnet and Nortel server
subnet after the restore process. The IPCONFIGURATION.txt file
is saved as part of your backup and is available after the restore.

24 Restart CP1.

—End—

Prepare the new 1005r or 1006r server (CP2)

The following procedures may be required depending upon your setup
configuration.
• Manually change the server name. (The CallPilot Configuration Wizard
can also be used to change the server name.)
For more information, see "Manually changing the server name" (page
46).

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 285

• Manually set the IP parameters. (The CallPilot Configuration Wizard can

also be used to set the IP parameters.)
For more information, see "Manually setting the IP parameters" (page
47).
Note: The procedures listed in the preceding bullets are performed
under the following circumstances:
1. If you are restoring from a network location. In order to perform a
restore the CLAN IP address must first be set.
2. If you are using a DNS as part of your network solution, then the
DNS entries must be manually completed.

• Check the Primary DNS suffix.

• Install antivirus software on both servers. (optional)
For more information about the antivirus software packages that are
approved by Nortel for CallPilot, see the P-2007-0101-Global : CallPilot
Support for Anti-Virus Applications bulletin.

Run the Setup Wizard on CP2

Run the Setup Wizard on the new 1005r or 1006r server (CP2), restoring the
data from the backup created by the Upgrade Wizard that was run on CP1.

CAUTION
Ensure you use the backup created from the CallPilot
5.0 Upgrade Wizard for the following reasons:
1. The backup provides the most current view of the
system.
2. The CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard corrects the data prior
to the backup.
3. Using an earlier backup can result in issues encountered
during the restore process.
4. The backup from the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard
includes the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard logs so that
they can be brought forward to CallPilot 5.0. These logs
can be used by Nortel Enterprise Technical Support
(NETS) to troubleshoot the system.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
286 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

Running the Setup Wizard on CP2

Step Action

1 Log on to the new CallPilot 1005r or 1006r server after the Windows
Mini-Setup is complete. The default password for the Administrator
account is Bvw250.

2 The Setup Wizard automatically launches if you log on to an

unconfigured CallPilot server. A CallPilot server, freshly upgraded
to CallPilot 5.0, is not configured. You can also launch the Setup
Wizard manually by clicking Start > Programs > CallPilot > Setup
Wizard.
Result: The CallPilot Setup Wizard welcome screen appears.
Note: If you exit after a successful restore and before the Setup
Wizard is finished, you can continue or restart the Setup Wizard.

If your backup is on a network drive or you are downloading PEPs

from the network, you must restore your network settings:
a. Specify the IP address and subnet mask for the Nortel server
subnet. Do not change your computer name unless necessary.
b. Specify the gateway for the Nortel server subnet (CLAN).
c. Restart the system (if prompted by Windows).
d. Log on to the CallPilot server. The default password for the
Administrator account is set to Bvw250.
If your backup is on tape, continue to the next step.

3 Read the information displayed on the screen and click Next.

Result: The Service Update (SU) / PEP Installation screen appears.

ATTENTION
If you downloaded PEPs, close the wizard, install the PEPs, and restart
if required. When the system is in service, restart the wizard and select
No on the Installing SU/PEP screen. If your PEPs are on CD, continue
with Step 4.

4 If Service Updates (SUs) or PEPs are available, you must install

the same SUs and PEPs that are installed on CP1. Select Yes or
No and click Next.
• If you choose Yes, install SU/PEPs:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 287

Result: The Installing SU/PEP screen appears.

1. Install all the required SUs and PEPs.
Note: After you install all the SUs and PEPs, restart (if
required).

2. If no restart was required, click Next to continue. Otherwise,

restart the server.

• If you choose No, do not install SU/PEPs now:

Result: The Platform Validity Check screen appears.

5 View the items on the Platform Validity Check screen and click Next.
Note: If your server does not meet the minimum hardware and
software requirements for the upgrade, contact your support
organization.

Result: The Telephony Board Validation screen appears.

6 If the system detects an error, an error message appears. You
cannot continue with the Setup Wizard. Do the following:
a. Power off the system.
b. Install the boards in the correct locations.
c. Restart the system.
d. Log on to Windows and restart the Setup Wizard.
e. Continue to the next step.
If your board configuration is correct, click Next to continue to the
next step.
Note: The following synchronization and disk space checks only
pause for display if the checks fail. Results of the checks are
written to the setup log.

7 The Setup Wizard performs a disk space check. There must be

enough free disk space to restore your backed up data.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
288 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

IF the disk THEN

does not have enough • the Checking Free Disk Space screen
free space appears.
• free up space on drive D by removing
unnecessary files.
• follow the link on the screen and use the
instructions to free up enough space, and
then click Next.
• the wizard performs another check and if
there is still not enough space, the Checking
Free Disk Space screen reappears.
• If there still is not enough free disk space,
exit the wizard and call your support
organization.
has enough free space • the Setup Wizard continues.

Note: Results of the disk space check are

written to the Setup Wizard log.

ATTENTION
The data restoration takes from 1 to 3 hours to complete.
Only use the backup created by the CallPilot 5.0 Upgrade Wizard.

8 On the Selecting Upgrade of the CallPilot screen, choose Yes to

continue with the restore process. Do not choose No.
Result: The Restore Medium Selection screen appears.

9 Choose the medium on which your backup is stored.

• If you choose to restore from disk:
Result: The Choose Remote Disk screen appears.
1. Find the remote disk to restore from and click on it.
2. Click Next to continue.

• If you choose to restore from tape:

1. Make sure the tape is firmly in the tape drive and click Next.
(If a tape is already in the drive, remove it and reinsert it.
Otherwise, a tape list can take up to two hours.)
Result: The List Backups screen appears.
2. Click List Backups to view a list of valid backups on your
backup medium.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 289

3. The available backups appear in the List of Backups table.

4. Select the backup that you want to use for the restore and
click Next.
Result: The Performing Restore screen appears. The
CallPilot services are shut down and the Wizard automatically
starts the restore operation. The progress bar shows the
percentage complete and the number of errors.

10 Determine if the restoration was successful.

IF the restoration THEN

was not successful • review the log files.
• Click Retry to start the restoration again.
• If you are still not successful, contact your
support organization.
was successful • click Next to continue.

Result: The Ready to Upgrade Database screen appears.

11 Click Next to start the database upgrade.

The warning screens for the Unsupported SMTP authentication
option and the Unsupported IMAP authentication option can appear
(same screens as in the Upgrade Wizard). Click Next through those
screens and the database upgrade starts.
Result: The database upgrade starts and the Upgrading Data
screen appears.

IF the database THEN

upgrade is
not successful • click Upgrade Database to try again.

Note: If subsequent attempts to upgrade the

database are not successful, contact your support
organization.
successful • the Setup Wizard continues.

12 Click Next to complete the Setup Wizard.

Result: The Finished screen appears.

13 Read the information displayed on the Finished screen and click

Finish.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
290 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

Result: A screen appears warning you that the system restarts

automatically.

14 Click OK.
Result: The system restarts.

—End—

Configure CP1 using the Configuration Wizard

Configuring CP1 using the Configuration Wizard

Step Action

1 On the existing CallPilot 1005r or 1006r server (CP1), log on to

CallPilot Manager:
a. After the Windows log on screen appears, log on with the current
password.
b. Launch Internet Explorer.
c. Enter http://<server name or IP address>/cpmgr in the URL
address box.
Result: The CallPilot Manager Logon Web page appears.
d. Log on using your existing CallPilot logon information. Enter
information into the following:
• Mailbox Number—Enter your existing mailbox number
(000000).
• Password—Enter your existing password for mailbox
000000.
• Server—Specify the name or the IP address of the CallPilot
server that you want to configure. (The server name may
have changed during the upgrade or platform migration.)

Note: When you launch Internet Explorer, you may see a

box that says "M/S IE Enhanced Security config is currently
enabled on your server. This advanced level of security
reduces risk." Nortel recommends that you do not lower the
security level. Nortel also recommends that you do not select
the check box to not show the message again. If you do
lower the security level and you try to access a Web site off
the server, it may be blocked by the security setting. You do
not receive a warning but a blank screen appears.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 291

e. Click Login.
Result: The system may prompt you to change the password
for the Administrator mailbox.
f. If prompted, do not change the password.
Result: The main CallPilot Manager screen appears.
2 Click the Configuration Wizard icon.
Result: A dialog box appears, prompting you to choose either an
Express or Standard setup.
3 Select CallPilot System Configuration (Standard Mode).

4 Click OK.
Result: The Configuration Wizard: Welcome screen appears.
Note: Because the CallPilot system is not yet configured, an
error dialog box can appear while you run the Configuration
Wizard. Disregard the error message by closing the dialog box,
and continue the configuration procedure.

5 On the Welcome screen, click Next.

Result: The Keycode and serial number screen appears.

6 If you have a new CallPilot 5.0 keycode with the High Availability
feature included, enter the serial number and new keycode.
If your CallPilot 5.0 keycode includes the High Availability feature
(but High Availability is not yet enabled), click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification screen appears.

7 Ensure that the details on the Feature Verification screen match

your expectations and click Next.
Note: If a feature is missing or is not what you expected, acquire
a new keycode from your Nortel distributor.

Result: The Server Information screen appears.

8 On the Server Information screen, enter the new host name in the
Computer Name field.

ATTENTION
The computer names of the High Availability servers must contain only
alphanumeric characters. Nonalphanumeric characters (such as a
hyphen [-]) are not supported.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
292 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

Note: You must change the computer name of CP1 so that the
current name can be reused as the Managed computer name for
the High Availability pair.

9 Click Next.
Result: The Password Information screen appears.

10 Select Leave the Password Unchanged.

11 Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation screen appears.

12 Verify the number of MPB boards and, if applicable, DSP cards, and
ensure that they match the hardware installed in the CallPilot server.
13 Change the Port Allocations as required.

14 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Information screen appears.
15 Verify the CDN configuration.
If you need to make changes, do the following:
a. Click New to add a new CDN.
Result: The system prompts you for the CDN and the name of
the application to dedicate to the CDN.
b. Specify the CDN, choose the application, and then click OK.
Result: The system returns you to the CDN Information page.

16 Click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory screen appears.

17 Select the Skip Language CD Validation option.

18 Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen appears.

19 On the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface screen, do the

following:
a. Make note of the current ELAN and CLAN IP addresses.
Note: These ELAN and CLAN IP address values from the
existing CallPilot 1005r or 1006r server (CP1) will be reused
as the Managed ELAN/CLAN IP address for the pair of
server in the new High Availability configuration.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 293

b. Change the ELAN and CLAN IP address values to the new

values.
c. Select the High Availability mode check box.
Note: To enable High Availability, a proper keycode is
required and the High Availability Mode check box must be
selected.

d. Enter IP information for the HB1, HB2, and MIRROR network

interface cards.
The following table shows the suggested default values for HB1,
HB2, and MIRROR on CP1. If you do not use these suggested
values, ensure that you use your new values throughout the
configuration.

Network Interface Card (NIC) IP Address Subnet Mask

Heartbeat 1 (HB1) 192.0.0.10 255.255.255.0
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) 194.0.0.10 255.255.255.0
MIRROR 193.0.0.10 255.255.255.0

20 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure screen appears.

21 Click Finish.
Result: A dialog box prompts you to confirm the configuration.

22 Click OK to configure CallPilot.

Result: The configuration is applied to the server. This task can
take from 5 to 10 minutes to complete, depending on the number of
languages installed and the number of programmed DSP cards. The
Configuration Wizard displays progress information.
After the configuration is applied to the server, a dialog box reminds
you to restart the server for the configuration to take effect.

23 Click OK to dismiss the dialog box.

Result: The system returns you to the main CallPilot Manager
screen.

24 Log off CallPilot Manager and close the Web browser.

25 Restart CP1.

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
294 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

Configuring the replacement server using the Configuration Wizard

ATTENTION
If you must go back into the Configuration Wizard at any time to correct any
entries, note that the Database, LDAP, and AOS services must be started to gain
access to CallPIlot Manager.
The D:\Nortel\HA folder contains a file called stat_svr.bat that automatically starts
any necessary services. This script can be run to start the required services.

ATTENTION
Ensure that the dongle is installed on the replacement server.

Configuring the replacement server using the Configuration

Wizard
Step Action
Time required: 20 minutes (assuming one language is installed).

1 Launch the Internet Explorer Web browser on the replacement

server.
2 In the address field, enter the following URL to start CallPilot
Manager: http://localhost/cpmgr.
Result: The CallPilot Manager Logon Web page appears.

3 Log on to CallPilot Manager using the administrator mailbox and

default password created from the CallPilot Setup Wizard:.
a. Under the User area, enter the following:
i. The administrator mailbox number is 000000.
ii. The default password is 124578.
b. Under the Server area, enter the localhost in the Server field.

4 Click Login.
Result: Change User Password window appears.
5 Change the password for 000000 administrator mailbox if necessary
by doing the following:
a. Enter the Current Password.
b. Enter the New Password.
c. Reenter the new password in New Password Re-entry field.
d. Click Save.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 295

Result: Welcome to CallPilot Manager page appears.

6 Click Configuration Wizard.

Result: Configuration Wizard: Welcome page appears.
7 Click Next.
Result: The Keycode and serial number page appears.

8 Enter the following:

a. In the Serial number field, enter the serial number of the dongle
assigned to the CallPilot server. The serial number entered for
the replacement server must be the same as the serial number
entered for the existing server.
b. In the Keycode field, enter the High Availability enabled keycode
assigned to the CallPilot server. The keycode entered for the
replacement server must be the same as the keycode entered
for the existing server.
9 Click Next.
Result: The Feature Verification page appears.

10 Ensure that all parameters are correct and that the High Availability
feature is set to Mirroring.

11 Click Next.
Result: The Server Information page appears.
12 On the Server Information page, do the following:
a. In the Computer Name field enter the CallPilot server name.
b. In the Time Zone field, select the correct time zone.
c. Under Dialog Information, enter the Area Code and Country
Code.
d. Enter LDAP search base. For example, dc=nortel,dc=ca.
Note: All values on the Server Information page for the
replacement server must be the same as for the existing server.
Use Table 3 "High Availability system checklist" (page 29) that
you completed for both nodes.

13 Click Next option.

Result: The Password Information page appears and Change the
password option is selected.

14 On the Password Information page, do the following:

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
296 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

a. In New Password field, enter the new password.

The new password entered for the replacement server must be
the same as the password used on the existing server.
b. In Confirm the new password field, reenter the new password.
The new password entered for the replacement server must be
the same as the password used on the existing server.
c. Click Next.
Result: A warning message appears.

15 Click Ok to dismiss the warning message.

Result: Password Information page reappears.
16 Click Next.
Result: The Multimedia Allocation page appears.

17 Configure the MPB96 settings.

18 Click Next.
Result: M1 Switch Information page appears.
19 Configure the switch information:
a. Select the Switch Type. Switch Type must be the same for both
nodes.
b. Enter the Switch Customer Number. Switch Customer Number
must be the same for both nodes.
c. Enter the Switch IP Address. Switch IP Address must be the
same for both nodes. See the Table 3 "High Availability system
checklist" (page 29) containing the information for both nodes.
d. Provision the channels as follows:
Note 1: To automatically provision a number of channels
you can enter the information for one channel, select the
number of channels required, and then click Fill. The
Configuration Wizard automatically datafills the channels,
and increments the TNs, ACD Position ID, and SCN.
Note 2: The number of TNs configured on both nodes must
be the same.
Note 3: To obtain switch-provisioning information, see the
completed Table 3 "High Availability system checklist" (page
29).

i. Select a channel.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 297

Result: The Channel Detail window appears.

ii. Enter the TN, ACD Position ID, and SCN.
iii. Ensure that Channel Allocation is set to Multimedia.
iv. Click Ok.
Result: The Meridian 1 Switch Information window appears
again.
v. Continue the provisioning of channels until complete.

20 Click Next.
Result: The Meridian 1 CDN Information page appears.

21 Click New to add a new CDN.

Result: The CDN Details page appears.

ATTENTION
The CDNs must be the same on both nodes.

22 On the CDN Details page, do the folllowing:

a. In the CDN field, enter the new CDN.
b. Select the Application Name (Voice Messaging or Multimedia
Messaging).
c. Click Ok.
Result: The new CDN is added and CDN information page
reappears.

23 Click Next.
Result: The Language Source Directory page appears.

24 Insert the CallPilot 5.0 Language CD in the CD/DVD drive on the

replacement server.

ATTENTION
You must use a CallPilot 5.0 Language CD.
Language CDs from previous CallPilot releases are not compatible
with CallPilot 5.0. The Configuration Wizard checks the version of the
Language CD and blocks the use of the CD if it is not a CallPilot 5.0 CD.

25 On the Language Source Directory Select page, do the following:

a. Select the Install Language option.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
298 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

b. In the Language CD Location field, enter the directory location

of the Language disk or file. Typically, CallPilot uses drive Z
(therefore, enter Z:).

26 Click Next.
Result: The Language Installation page appears.
27 On the Language Installation page, do the following:.
a. Select Languages and Automated Speech recognition to be
installed.
b. Select Primary and Secondary Languages.
Note: The Secondary Language is optional.

ATTENTION
The same languages must be installed on both nodes. Ensure that the
Primary and Secondary languages are also the same on both nodes.

28 Click Next.
Result: The CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page appears.
29 On the CallPilot Local Area Network Interface page, do the following:
a. Select the network interface card from the drop-down list.
Result: The MAC addres, IP address, and Subnet mask values
are updated for the network interface card.
b. Change the ELAN and CLAN IP information (IP address and
Subnet Mask).
c. Select the High Availability mode check box to display the High
Availability Network Interfaces.
Note: To enable High Availability, a proper keycode is
required and the High Availability Mode check box must
be selected. The keycode has the ability to enable High
Availability; however, the feature does not have to be enabled
and can be done at a later date.

d. Enter IP information for the HB1, HB2, and MIRROR network

interface cards.
The following table shows the suggested default values for
HB1, HB2, and MIRROR on both servers. If you do not use
these suggested values, ensure that you use your new values
throughout the configuration.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 299

Network Interface CP#1 IP CP#2 IP Subnet Mask

Card (NIC)
Heartbeat 1 (HB1) 192.0.0.10 192.0.0.11 255.255.255.0
Heartbeat 2 (HB2) 194.0.0.10 194.0.0.11 255.255.255.0
MIRROR 193.0.0.10 193.0.0.11 255.255.255.0

30 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Configure page appears.

31 Click Finish to start process.

Result: The system starts the configuration process and Progress
Information page appears.

32 After the process is complete, a dialog box reminds you to restart

the server for the configuration to take effect.

33 Click OK to dismiss the dialog box. Restart the replacement server.

—End—

Complete the High Availability configuration process

Use the following procedure to guide you through the remainder of the High
Availability configuration process.

Completing the High Availability feature configuration

Step Action

1 Connect the LAN.

For more information, see "Connect and verify LAN connections"
(page 75) and complete the following procedures:
• "Connecting and verifying LAN connections" (page 76)
• "Modifying the hosts file" (page 80) (optional)
• "Testing the host name resolution" (page 82)

2 Check the configuration of CP1 and CP2.

For more information, see "Running Stage 1 of the High Availability
Configuration Wizard to check CP1 and CP2 configuration" (page
83).

3 Install the AutoStart Software on CP1.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
300 Chapter 7 Upgrades, migrations, and feature expansion

For more information, see "Installing the AutoStart Agent and

Console software on CP1" (page 86).

4 Add the replacement server Administrator account to the AutoStart

Console.
For more information, see "Add the node 2 administrator account to
the AutoStart Console on node 1" (page 94).

5 Install the AutoStart software on CP2.

For more information, see "Installing the AutoStart Agent and
Console software on CP2" (page 96).
6 To configure the AutoStart software, do the following:
a. Configure the AutoStart software.
For more information, see "Configure the AutoStart software"
(page 106).

WARNING
You must wait for both servers under Domains >
[AutoStart_Domain] > Nodes to appear green before
making any changes in the AutoStart Console. Failure
to do so can result in the loss of configured information
for verification links upon the next restart.

i. Modify the AutoStart Domain and Verification links.

For more information, see "Modifying the AutoStart Domain
and Verification links" (page 106).
ii. Add the Remote Mirroring Host for the new 1005r or 1006r
server (CP2).
For more information, see "Adding the Remote Mirroring
Host for CP2" (page 109).
b. Generate the AutoStart Definition File.
For more information, see "Generating the AutoStart Definition
File" (page 112).
c. Import the AutoStart Definition File.
For more information, see "Importing the AutoStart definition
file" (page 114).
d. Add the Windows administrator account password for the
AutoStart Utility Processes.

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Feature Expansion: Adding the High Availability feature to an existing CallPilot 5.0 1005r or 1006r
server 301

For more information, see "Adding the Windows administrator

account password for the AutoStart Utility Processes" (page
115).

7 Bring the Resource Groups online.

For more information, see "Bring the Resource Groups online" (page
119).
a. Bring the CallPilot Resource Group online on CP1.
For more information, see "Bringing the CallPilot Resource
Group online on CP1" (page 119).
b. Bring the CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] Resources Groups
online.
For more information, see "Bringing the Resource Groups
CallPilot_[CP1] and CallPilot_[CP2] online" (page 122).

8 Create the CallPilot Reporter connections. For more information,

see "Creating the CallPilot Reporter connection" (page 126).
9 If required, add the servers to a Windows domain. See "Joining a
Windows domain" (page 127).

—End—

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 302

Index
A import 200
automatic failover 38, 217
AutoStart software 18 F
configuring 106 failover 20, 37, 217
definition file 114, 200 automatic 217
installing 86 manual 220
licence administration 196 status 197
maintaining 187 feature expansion 273, 277
notification settings 188
reinstall 221, 234
stand-alone PC 221
H
High Availability
uninstall 221, 231
Configuration Wizard 113
updates 221, 234
Stage 1 82
Utility Processes 115
Stage 2 82
feature expansion 273, 277
B installing 41
backup 243 maintaining 133
planning 25
C system checklist 29
CallPilot Reporter 125
channel capacity 173 L
Configuration Wizard 54 LAN connections 75
connections
CLAN 75 M
ELAN 75 maintainence
HB1 16, 27, 75 languages 146
HB2 16, 27, 75 media allocation 141
mirror 16, 27, 75 network interface cards 149
copyright 2 network settings 149
server information 134
D switch configuration 143
definition file manual failover 39, 220
export 200 migration 273

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
 Index 303

monitoring 217 S
starting 217
server
montoring
reimage 250
stopping 217
replace 250
status 197
N software licenses 164
networking settings status
local 149 failover 197
managed 156 HB1 197
HB2 197
P mirror 197
PEP 235 server 197
planning support 235
facility 31 switch
hardware requirements 33 IP address change 209
High Availability configuration 28
management 25 T
network 27 trademarks 2
switch 32
U
R upgrade 273
regulatory information 2 guidelines 275
remote support 240 utility processes
resource group 119, 213 password change 163
restore 243, 249

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
304 Index

Nortel CallPilot
High Availability: Installation and Configuration
NN44200-311 01.18 Standard
5.0 23 April 2010
Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
.
Nortel CallPilot

High Availability: Installation and Configuration

Copyright © 2007–2010, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.

Publication: NN44200-311
Document status: Standard
Document version: 01.18
Document date: 23 April 2010

To provide feedback or report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.

Sourced in Canada

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and
recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied
warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in
this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.

*Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

*Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.